WO2013022740A2 - Gpr35 ligands and the uses thereof - Google Patents

Gpr35 ligands and the uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013022740A2
WO2013022740A2 PCT/US2012/049483 US2012049483W WO2013022740A2 WO 2013022740 A2 WO2013022740 A2 WO 2013022740A2 US 2012049483 W US2012049483 W US 2012049483W WO 2013022740 A2 WO2013022740 A2 WO 2013022740A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
substituted
unsubstituted
gpr35
alkyl
cancer
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US2012/049483
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO2013022740A3 (en
Inventor
Huayun Deng
Ye Fang
Haibei Hu
Original Assignee
Corning Incorporated
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Corning Incorporated filed Critical Corning Incorporated
Publication of WO2013022740A2 publication Critical patent/WO2013022740A2/en
Publication of WO2013022740A3 publication Critical patent/WO2013022740A3/en

Links

Classifications

    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/60—Salicylic acid; Derivatives thereof
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/192—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having aromatic groups, e.g. sulindac, 2-aryl-propionic acids, ethacrynic acid 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/185—Acids; Anhydrides, halides or salts thereof, e.g. sulfur acids, imidic, hydrazonic or hydroximic acids
    • A61K31/19—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid
    • A61K31/195—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group
    • A61K31/197—Carboxylic acids, e.g. valproic acid having an amino group the amino and the carboxyl groups being attached to the same acyclic carbon chain, e.g. gamma-aminobutyric acid [GABA], beta-alanine, epsilon-aminocaproic acid or pantothenic acid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/34—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having five-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. isosorbide
    • A61K31/343—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having five-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. isosorbide condensed with a carbocyclic ring, e.g. coumaran, bufuralol, befunolol, clobenfurol, amiodarone
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/35—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/352—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having six-membered rings with one oxygen as the only ring hetero atom condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. methantheline 
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/335—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin
    • A61K31/357—Heterocyclic compounds having oxygen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. fungichromin having two or more oxygen atoms in the same ring, e.g. crown ethers, guanadrel
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/38—Heterocyclic compounds having sulfur as a ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/381—Heterocyclic compounds having sulfur as a ring hetero atom having five-membered rings
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/403—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. carbazole
    • A61K31/404—Indoles, e.g. pindolol
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A61K31/4439—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems containing a five-membered ring with nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. omeprazole

Definitions

  • G protein-coupled receptors have been and continue to be one of the richest families of drug targets. There are at least two key drivers for this.
  • the first driver is the increasing numbers of orphan receptors being deorphanized, some of which have implications for human diseases. Examples are GPR3 for Alzheimer's disease and GPR40 for diabetes.
  • the second driver is associated with the recent realization that GPCRs are competent to elicit a rich array of cell signaling pathways (i.e., pleiotropic signaling), and ligands may give operational biases to activate the receptor. These pathway biased ligands may open new revenues for drug discovery.
  • GPR35 is a rhodopsin-like GPCR first identified in 1998 (O'Dowd, et al, Genomics 47: 310-313 (1998)).
  • the human GPR35 gene encodes a protein of 309 amino acids.
  • GPR35 is expressed in various mammalian tissues, such as the gastrointestinal tissues, lymphoid tissues and the central and peripheral nervous tissues.
  • Several investigators have reported GPR35 to be involved in the development of gastric cancer (Okumura, et al, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135 (2004)), the regulation of neuronal excitability and synaptic release (Guo, et al, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther.
  • Both kynurenic acid and LPA elicited several cellular responses in HEK293 cells and/or CHO cells expressing GPR35.
  • 2-acyl LPA markedly enhanced the Ca 2+ response, the activation of RhoA and the phosphorylation of ERK in GPR35 -expressing cells.
  • 2-Acyl LPA also induced the
  • kynurenic acid or LPA is the natural agonist for GPR35.
  • GPR35-P-arrestin-2 interaction assay Jenkins et al, discovered a number of compounds possessing agonist activity on GPR35. These agonists include cromolyn disodium, dicumarol, pamoate, niflumic acid, and luteolin. These compounds active at human GPR35 in the P-arrestin-2 interaction assay were also able to promote cell growth via Gal3 (Jenkins, et al, Biochemical Journal 432, 451-459 (2010)).
  • compositions containing a compound of Formula I or II are disclosed.
  • R 1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when R 1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N0 2 , -SO 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R 8 can be -H, -OH, -N0 2 , -S0 2 (NH 3 ), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
  • R 7 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 and R 12 can each individually be -H, -OH, -NO 2 , -SO 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • the compounds disclosed herein can be GPR35 modulators.
  • the compounds are useful as therapeutic agents for modulating GPR35, and for treatment or reducing the risk of diseases that are related to the activity of GPR35.
  • Figures 1A-1D show that Bumetanide acts as a GPR35 agonist.
  • Figure 1A shows the dynamic mass redistribution (DMR) of HT29 cells in response to stimulation with bumetanide at different doses;
  • Figure IB shows the DMR amplitude as the function of bumetanide concentrations;
  • Figure 1C shows the dose-dependent desensitization by bumetanide in DMR signal of HT29 in response to the known GPR35 agonist zaprinast.
  • the cells were prestimulated with bumetanide at different doses (as indicated in the figures) for lhr, followed by stimulation with zaprinast at a fixed dose (1 micromolar). The zaprinast DMR was shown.
  • Figure ID shows the zaprinast DMR amplitude as a function of bumetanide.
  • Figures 2A-2L show DMR signals of HT29 upon stimulation with compound solutions. Each graph represents an averaged response of 2 to 4 replicates.
  • Figure 2A shows the DMR responding buffer vehicle (HBSS) which is used as a negative control.
  • Figure 2B to 2L shows the DMR signals induced by various GPR35 agonists at a concentration close to its EC80.
  • HBSS DMR responding buffer vehicle
  • Figure 2B shows the DMR of L-DOPA at ImM
  • Figure 2C shows the DMR of DL- DOPA at ImM
  • Figure 2D shows the DMR of 3-nitro-L-tyrosine at 0.5mM
  • Figure 2E shows the DMR of DOPAC at ImM
  • Figure 2F shows the DMR of HIBA at 250 ⁇
  • Figure 2G shows the DMR of 3,3',5'-Triiodo-L-thyronine(T3) at 128 ⁇
  • Figure 2H shows the DMR of 3-Iodo-L-tyrosine at ImM
  • Figure 21 shows the DMR of DL-3,4-Dihydroxymandelate at ImM
  • Figure 2J shows the DMR of Gentisate at 250 ⁇
  • Figure 2K shows the DMR of compound 1 at 32 ⁇
  • Figure 2L shows the DMR of compound 2 at 32 ⁇ .
  • FIG. 3 shows the stimulation of HT29 cells with identified GPR35 agonists which led to phosphorylation of ERK1/2, as measured using Western Blotting.
  • HT29 cells were seeded in 6-well microplate at a density of 3x10 A 6 cells/well. After overnight culture, HT29 cells were treated with various GPR35 ligands for 30min. After harvesting using 100 ⁇ of RIPA lysis buffer (with protease inhibitor cocktail), cytosolic proteins were extracted and protein concentration was determined. Loading amount of proteins per sample was 200 ⁇ g of the total cytosolic protein. After electrophoresis, the total ERK and phosphorylated ER l/2 were blotted using respective antibodies. Actin was also blotted and used as a control.
  • Figures 4A-4F show that GPR35 agonists caused internalization of GPR35 receptors in HT29 cells. The cells were stimulated with compounds for 30min at 37° C and stained with anti-GPR35 antibody.
  • Figure 4A shows DMSO as a negative control
  • Figure 4B shows the known GPR35 agonist pamoic acid at 10 ⁇
  • Figure 4C shows Compound 2 at 12.5 ⁇
  • Figure 4D shows Luciferin at ImM
  • Figure 4E shows L-DOPA at 2mM
  • Figure 4F shows Nitro-L-tyrosine at 50 ⁇ .
  • Figures 5A-5D show that GPR35 agonist-induced DMR signals can be blocked by a known GPR35 antagonist CID2745687.
  • Figure 5A shows that the antagonist did not lead to any detectable DMR in HT29, but it at 32 micromolar almost completely blocked the DMR induced by 500nM zaprinast.
  • Figure 5B shows that the antagonist dose-dependently blocked the DMR induced by zaprinast at 500nM.
  • Figure 5C shows that the antagonist dose- dependently blocked the DMR induced by compound 2 at 64 micromolar.
  • Figure 5D shows that the antagonist dose-dependently blocked the DMR induced by lapachol at 8 micromolar.
  • FIGS. 6A-6C show that GPR35 agonists can result in GPR35 dependent beta- arrestin translocation, as assayed using Tango beta-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays.
  • compositions including an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or II:
  • compositions can further include additional agents. These compositions are useful for modulating the activity of GPR35, thus to improve the prevention and treatment of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders.
  • R 1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when R 1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N0 2 , -SO 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R can be -H, -OH, -N0 2 , -S0 2 (NH 3 ), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
  • R 7 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 and R 12 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N0 2 , -S0 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • the disclosed methods also encompass methods for treating or reducing the risk of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders and cancers, including administering to a subject Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition including Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof.
  • the disclosed methods can also include administering to the subject an additional agent separately or in a combination composition with disclosed embodiments or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof.
  • GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders and cancers in vivo or in vitro administering Formula I or II, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Formula I or II can be administered in an effective amount to a subject.
  • GPCRs G Protein-Coupled Receptors
  • G protein coupled receptors are intrinsic membrane proteins which comprise a large superfamily of receptors.
  • the family of G protein-coupled receptors has at least 250 members (Strader et al. FASEB J., 9:745-754, 1995; Strader et al. Annu. Rev.
  • GPCRs have been classified into six families, originally thought to be unrelated, three of which are found in vertebrates. Recent work has identified several new GCPR families and suggested the possibility of a common evolutionary origin for all of them.
  • TMs transmembrane regions
  • GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. It is well known that these structures detailed above are common among G protein coupled receptor proteins and that the amino acid sequences corresponding to the area where the protein passes through the membrane (membrane-spanning region or transmembrane region) and the amino acid sequences near the membrane-spanning region are often highly conserved among the receptors. Thus, due to the high degree of homology in GPCRs, the identification of novel GPCRs, as well identification of both the intracellular and the extracellular portions of such novel members, is readily accomplished by those of skill in the art.
  • GPR35 is a rhodopsin-like GPCR first identified in 1998 (O'Dowd, et al, Genomics 47: 310-313 (1998)). GPR35 was first identified to an orphan GPCR that contains 309 amino acids. GPR35b, a splicing variant that contains an N-terminal extension of 31 amino acids, was later discovered in gastric cancer cells in 2004, and shown to be capable of transforming NIH-3T3 cells (Okumura, et al, , Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135 (2004))). GPR35 has been found to be expressed in various tissues including stomach, gastrointestinal tissues, and mast cells, basophils and eosinophils. Upregulation of GPR35 has also been identified in human mast cells upon challenge with IgE antibodies, in human macrophages after exposure to benzo(a)pyrene, in failing heart cells, and in gastric cancer cells.
  • ligands particularly the endogenous ligands, that activate GPR35 are desired.
  • GPR35 Several agonists for GPR35 reported so far, including kynurenic acid, NPPB, zaprinast, pamoic acid and lysophosphatidic acid (LPA). Both kynurenic acid and LPA are indicated to be an endogenous ligand for GPR35 (Wang, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 281 : 22021-22028 (2006); Oka, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 395: 232-237 (2010)).
  • kynurenic acid and LPA elicited several cellular responses in HEK293 cells and/or CHO cells expressing GPR35.
  • 2-acyl LPA markedly enhanced the Ca2+ response, the activation of RhoA and the phosphorylation of ERK in GPR35 -expressing cells.
  • 2-Acyl LPA also induced the internalization of the receptor molecules.
  • kynurenic acid or LPA is the natural agonist for GPR35.
  • These agonists include cromolyn disodium, dicumarol, pamoate, niflumic acid, and luteolin. These compounds active at human GPR35 in the P-arrestin-2 interaction assay were also able to promote cell growth via Gal3 (Jenkins, et al, Biochemical Journal 432, 451-459 (2010)).
  • An analytical method is for example, a method which measures a molecule or substance.
  • gas chromatography, gel permeation chromatography, high resolution gas chromatography, high resolution mass spectrometry, or mass spectrometry is analytical methods.
  • Assaying, assay, or like terms refers to an analysis to determine a characteristic of a substance, such as a molecule or a cell, such as for example, the presence, absence, quantity, extent, kinetics, dynamics, or type of an a cell's optical or bio impedance response upon stimulation with one or more exogenous stimuli, such as a ligand or marker.
  • Producing a biosensor signal of a cell's response to a stimulus can be an assay.
  • Assaying the response means using a means to characterize the response. For example, if a molecule is brought into contact with a cell, a biosensor can be used to assay the response of the cell upon exposure to the molecule.
  • Agonism action refers to the binding of a molecule to a receptor that leads to the activation of the receptor, thus triggering a cellular response similar to the cellular response for a known agonist for the receptor.
  • Antagonism action refers to the binding of a molecule to a receptor that leads to the inhibition of the receptor. 9. Agonism and antagonism mode
  • the agonism mode or like terms is the assay wherein the cells are exposed to a molecule to determine the ability of the molecule to trigger biosensor signals such as DMR signals
  • the antagonism mode is the assay wherein the cells are exposed to a maker in the presence of a molecule to determine the ability of the molecule to modulate the biosensor signal of cells responding to the marker.
  • An antinflammatory agent is any agent that has an anti-inflammatory activity.
  • anti-inflammation agent are Cox inhibitors such as ibuprofen, aspirin, tylenol, or GPR35 agonists, or GPR35-hERG complex activators.
  • An anti-metabolic disorder agent is any agent that has an effect in suppressing, reducing, or preventing diseases associated with metabolic disorders. Metabolism is the process human body uses to get or make energy from the food. Food is made up of proteins, carbohydrates and fats. Chemicals in digestive system break the food parts down into sugars and acids, thus providing fuels. The body can use this fuel right away, or it can store the energy in tissues, such as liver, muscles and body fat. A metabolic disorder occurs when abnormal chemical reactions in human body disrupt this process. When this happens, one might have too much of some substances or too little of other ones that one need to stay healthy.
  • An anti-congestive heart failure agent is any agent that has an effect in
  • An anti-cancer agent is any agent that has an anti-cancer effect, such as vinblastine or taxol.
  • Biosensor or like terms refer to a device for the detection of an analyte that combines a biological component with a physico chemical detector component.
  • the biosensor typically consists of three parts: a biological component or element (such as tissue, microorganism, pathogen, cells, or combinations thereof), a detector element (works in a physicochemical way such as optical, piezoelectric, electrochemical, thermometric, or magnetic), and a transducer associated with both components.
  • the biological component or element can be, for example, a living cell, a pathogen, or combinations thereof.
  • an optical biosensor can comprise an optical transducer for converting a molecular recognition or molecular stimulation event in a living cell, a pathogen, or combinations thereof into a quantifiable signal.
  • Typical biosensors used for label- free cellular assays are surface plasmon resonance, plasmon resonance imaging, resonant waveguide grating biosensor, photonic crystal biosensor, and electric impedance biosensors.
  • a “biosensor response”, “biosensor output signal”, “biosensor signal” or like terms is any reaction of a sensor system having a cell to a cellular response.
  • a biosensor converts a cellular response to a quantifiable sensor response.
  • a biosensor response is an optical response upon stimulation as measured by an optical biosensor such as surface plasmon resonance (SPR) or resonant waveguide grating (RWG) biosensor or it is a bioimpedence response of the cells upon stimulation as measured by an electric biosensor. Since a biosensor response is directly associated with the cellular response upon stimulation, the biosensor response and the cellular response can be used interchangeably, in
  • a "biosensor signal” or like terms refers to the signal of cells measured with a biosensor that is produced by the response of a cell upon stimulation.
  • a “biosensor index” or like terms is an index made up of a collection of biosensor data.
  • a biosensor index can be a collection of biosensor profiles, such as primary profiles, or secondary profiles.
  • the index can be comprised of any type of data.
  • an index of profiles could be comprised of just an N-DMR data point, it could be a P-DMR data point, or both or it could be an impedence data point. It could be all of the data points associated with the profile curve.
  • cell as used herein also refers to individual cells, cell lines, or cultures derived from such cells.
  • a "culture” refers to a composition comprising isolated cells of the same or a different type. The term co-culture is used to designate when more than one type of cell are cultured together in the same dish with either full or partial contact with each other.
  • a cell can be a recombinantly engineered cell wherein the cell comprises exogenous nucleic acid.
  • Cell refers not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term as used herein.
  • Cell culture or “cell culturing” refers to the process by which either prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells are grown under controlled conditions. “Cell culture” not only refers to the culturing of cells derived from multicellular eukaryotes, especially animal cells, but also the culturing of complex tissues and organs.
  • a "cell panel” or like terms is a panel which comprises at least two types of cells.
  • the cells can be of any type or combination disclosed herein.
  • a "cellular response" or like terms is any reaction by the cell to a stimulation.
  • a cellular process or like terms is a process that takes place in or by a cell.
  • Examples of cellular process include, but not limited to, proliferation, apoptosis, necrosis, differentiation, cell signal transduction, polarity change, migration, or transformation.
  • a "cellular target” or like terms is a biopolymer such as a protein or nucleic acid whose activity can be modified by an external stimulus.
  • Cellular targets are most commonly proteins such as enzymes, kinases, ion channels, and receptors.
  • Characterizing or like terms refers to gathering information about any property of a substance, such as a ligand, molecule, marker, or cell, such as obtaining a profile for the ligand, molecule, marker, or cell.
  • alkyl refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbyl substituent (i.e., a substituent obtained from a hydrocarbon by removal of a hydrogen) containing from one to twenty carbon atoms; in one embodiment from one to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from one to ten carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from one to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from one to three carbon atoms.
  • substituents include methyl, ethyl, propyl (including n-propyl and isopropyl), butyl (including n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl), pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbyl substituent containing one or more double bonds and from two to twenty carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from two to four carbon atoms.
  • alkenyl include ethenyl (also known as vinyl), allyl, propenyl (including 1-propenyl and 2- propenyl) and butenyl (including 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl and 3-butenyl).
  • alkenyl includes substituents having "cis” and "trans” orientations, or alternatively, "E” and "Z” orientations.
  • alkynyl refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbyl substituent containing one or more triple bonds and from two to twenty carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from two to four carbon atoms.
  • alkynyl include ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, methylpropynyl, 4-methyl-l- butynyl,4-propyl-2 -pentynyl- , and 4-butyl-2-hexynyl.
  • benzyl refers to methyl radical substituted with phenyl, i.e., the
  • carbocyclic ring refers to a saturated cyclic, partially saturated cyclic, or aromatic ring containing from 3 to 14 carbon ring atoms ("ring atoms" are the atoms bound together to form the ring).
  • a carbocyclic ring typically contains from 3 to 10 carbon ring atoms. Examples include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and phenyl.
  • a “carbocyclic ring system” alternatively may be 2 or 3 rings fused together, such as naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthalenyl (also known as “tetralinyl”), indenyl, isoindenyl, indanyl,
  • heterocyclic ring refers to a saturated cyclic, partially saturated cyclic, or aromatic ring containing from 3 to 14 ring atoms ("ring atoms" are the atoms bound together to form the ring), in which at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom that is oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, with the remaining ring atoms being independently selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur.
  • a heterocycloalkyl alternatively may comprise 2 or 3 rings fused together, wherein at least one such ring contains a heteroatom as a ring atom (e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur).
  • the ring atom of the heterocycloalkyl substituent that is bound to the group may be the at least one heteroatom, or it may be a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom.
  • heterocycloalkyl substituent is in turn substituted with a group or substituent, the group or substituent may be bound to the at least one heteroatom, or it may be bound to a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom.
  • heterocyclic ring also includes substituents that are fused to a C 6 -Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, wherein a group having such a fused heterocyclic group as a substituent is bound to a heteroatom of the heterocyclic group or to a carbon atom of the heterocycloalkyl group.
  • substituents that are fused to a C 6 -Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, wherein a group having such a fused heterocyclic group as a substituent is bound to a heteroatom of the heterocyclic group or to a carbon atom of the heterocycloalkyl group.
  • cycloalkyl refers to a saturated carbocyclic substituent having three to fourteen carbon atoms. In one embodiment, a cycloalkyl substituent has three to ten carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl.
  • cycloalkyl also includes substituents that are fused to a C 6 -Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered hetero aromatic ring, wherein a group having such a fused cycloalkyl group as a substituent is bound to a carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group.
  • the one or more substituents are each bound to a carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group.
  • cycloalkenyl refers to a partially unsaturated carbocyclic substituent having three to fourteen carbon atoms, typically three to ten carbon atoms.
  • Examples of cycloalkenyl include cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, and cyclohexenyl.
  • a cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl may be a single ring, which typically contains from 3 to 6 ring atoms. Examples include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and phenyl. Alternatively, 2 or 3 rings may be fused together, such as bicyclodecanyl and decalinyl.
  • aryl refers to an aromatic substituent containing one ring or two or three fused rings.
  • the aryl substituent may have six to eighteen carbon atoms. As an example, the aryl substituent may have six to fourteen carbon atoms.
  • aryl may refer to substituents such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl.
  • aryl also includes substituents such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl that are fused to a C 4 -C 10 carbocyclic ring, such as a C 5 or a C 6 carbocyclic ring, or to a 4-10-membered heterocyclic ring, wherein a group having such a fused aryl group as a substituent is bound to an aromatic carbon of the aryl group.
  • substituents such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl that are fused to a C 4 -C 10 carbocyclic ring, such as a C 5 or a C 6 carbocyclic ring, or to a 4-10-membered heterocyclic ring, wherein a group having such a fused aryl group as a substituent is bound to an aromatic carbon of the aryl group.
  • aryl groups include accordingly phenyl, naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthalenyl (also known as “tetralinyl”), indenyl, isoindenyl, indanyl, anthracenyl, phenanthrenyl, benzonaphthenyl (also known as "phenalenyl”), and fluorenyl.
  • heteroaryl refers to an aromatic ring structure containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms in which at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (i.e., oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur), with the remaining ring atoms being independently selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur.
  • a heteroaryl may be a single ring or 2 or 3 fused rings.
  • heteroaryl substituents include 6-membered ring substituents such as pyridyl, pyrazyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyridazinyl; 5-membered ring substituents such as triazolyl, imidazolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, 1,2,3-, 1,2,4-, 1,2,5-, or 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl and isothiazolyl; 6/5-membered fused ring substituents such as benzothio furanyl, isobenzothio furanyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, purinyl, and anthranilyl; and 6/6-membered fused rings such as quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinazolinyl, and 1 ,4-benzox
  • the ring atom of the heteroaryl substituent that is bound to the group may be the at least one heteroatom, or it may be a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom.
  • heteroaryl also includes pyridyl N-oxides and groups containing a pyridine N-oxide ring.
  • hydrogen refers to hydrogen substituent, and may be depicted as -H.
  • hydroxy refers to -OH.
  • the prefix "hydroxy" indicates that the substituent to which the prefix is attached is substituted with one or more hydroxy substituents.
  • Compounds bearing a carbon to which one or more hydroxy substituents include, for example, alcohols, enols and phenol.
  • hydroxyalkyl refers to an alkyl that is substituted with at least one hydroxy substituent.
  • examples of hydroxyalkyl include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and hydro xybutyl.
  • nitro means -N0 2 .
  • carbonyl means -C(O)-, which also may be depicted as:
  • amino refers to -NR 2 .
  • An amino group can be a primary, secondary or tertiary amino group.
  • Each R in -NR 2 can individually be -H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynykl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl.
  • alkylamino refers to an amino group, wherein at least one alkyl chain is bonded to the amino nitrogen in place of a hydrogen atom. Examples of alkylamino substituents include mono alkylamino such as methylamino (exemplified by the formula
  • dialkylamino such as dimethylamino, (exemplified by the formula -N(CH 3 ) 2 ), which may also be depicted:
  • amino carbonyl means -C(0)-NH 2 , which also may be depicted
  • halogen refers to fluorine (which may be depicted as -F), chlorine (which may be depicted as -CI), bromine (which may be depicted as -Br), or iodine (which may be depicted as -I).
  • the halogen is chlorine.
  • the halogen is a fluorine.
  • halo indicates that the substituent to which the prefix is attached is substituted with one or more independently selected halogen substituents.
  • haloalkyl refers to an alkyl that is substituted with at least one halogen substituent. Where more than one hydrogen is replaced with halogens, the halogens may be the identical or different. Examples of haloalkyls include chloromethyl, dichloromethyl,
  • haloalkoxy refers to an alkoxy that is substituted with at least one halogen substituent. Examples of haloalkoxy substituents include chloromethoxy, 1-bromoethoxy, fluoromethoxy,
  • perfiuoroalkyl refers to an alkyl substituent wherein a fluorine substituent is in the place of each hydrogen substituent.
  • perfiuoroalkyl substituents include trifluoromethyl (-CF 3 ), perfluorobutyl, perfluoroisopropyl,
  • perfluoroalkoxy refers to an alkoxy substituent wherein each hydrogen substituent is replaced with a fluorine substituent.
  • perfluoroalkoxy substituents include trifluoromethoxy (-0-CF 3 ), perfluorobutoxy, perfluoroisopropoxy, perfluorododecoxy, and perfluorodecoxy.
  • oxy refers to an ether substituent, and may be depicted as -0-.
  • alkoxy refers to an alkyl linked to an oxygen, which may also be represented as -O-R, wherein the R represents the alkyl group.
  • alkoxy include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy and butoxy.
  • alkylthio means -S-alkyl.
  • methylthio is -S-CH 3 .
  • alkylthio examples include ethylthio, propylthio, butylthio, and hexylthio.
  • alkylcarbonyl means -C(0)-alkyl.
  • ethylcarbonyl may
  • alkylcarbonyl examples include methylcarbonyl, propylcarbonyl, butylcarbonyl, pentylcabonyl, and hexylcarbonyl.
  • amino alkylcarbonyl means -C(0)-alkyl-NH 2 .
  • alkoxycarbonyl means -C(0)-0-alkyl.
  • ethoxycarbonyl may be depicted as: .
  • alkoxycarbonyl examples include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, propoxycarbonyl,
  • the resulting functional group is an ester.
  • thio and thia mean a divalent sulfur atom and such a substituent may be depicted as -S-.
  • a thioether is represented as "alkyl-thio-alkyl” or, alternatively, alkyl-S-alkyl.
  • thiol refers to a sulfhydryl substituent, and may be depicted as -SH.
  • sulfonyl refers to -S(0) 2 -, which also may be depicted .
  • alkyl-sulfonyl-alkyl refers to alkyl-S(0) 2 -alkyl.
  • alkylsulfonyl examples include methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, and propylsulfonyl.
  • amino sulfonyl means -S(0) 2 -NH 2 , which also may be depicted
  • alkylsulfinylalkyl or “alkylsulfoxidoalkyl” refers to alkyl-S(0)-alkyl.
  • exemplary alkylsulfmyl groups include methylsulfmyl, ethylsulfinyl, butylsulfinyl, and hexylsulfinyl.
  • heteroaryls examples include furanyl, dihydrofuranyl,
  • thiophenyl also known as "thiofuranyl"
  • dihydrothiophenyl tetrahydrothiophenyl
  • pyrrolyl isopyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolyl, isoimidazolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, dithiolyl, oxathiolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiazolinyl, isothiazolinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, thiaediazolyl, oxathiazolyl, oxadiazolyl (including oxadiazolyl,
  • 1,2,3,4-oxatriazolyl or 1,2,3,5-oxatriazolyl dioxazolyl (including 1,2,3-dioxazolyl,
  • oxathiolanyl pyranyl (including 1,2-pyranyl or 1,4-pyranyl), dihydropyranyl, pyridinyl (also known as "azinyl”), piperidinyl, diazinyl (including pyridazinyl (also known as
  • 1,2-diazinyl pyrimidinyl (also known as “1,3 -diazinyl” or “pyrimidyl”), or pyrazinyl (also known as “1,4-diazinyl”)), piperazinyl, triazinyl (including s-triazinyl (also known as “1,3,5-triazinyl”), as-triazinyl (also known 1,2,4-triazinyl), and v-triazinyl (also known as "1,2,3-triazinyi”)), oxazinyl (including 1,2,3-oxazinyl, 1,3,2-oxazinyl, 1,3,6-oxazinyl (also known as "pentoxazolyl”), 1,2,6-oxazinyl, or 1 ,4-oxazinyl), isoxazinyl (including
  • o-isoxazinyl or p-isoxazinyl oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, oxathiazinyl (including
  • 2-fused-ring heteroaryls examples include, indolizinyl, pyrindinyl,
  • pyranopyrrolyl 4H-quinolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, pyridopyridinyl (including pyrido[3,4-b]-pyridinyl, pyrido [3, 2-b] -pyridinyl, or pyrido[4,3-b]-pyridinyl), and pteridinyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indoleninyl, isoindazolyl, benzazinyl, phthalazinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, benzo diazinyl, benzopyranyl, benzothiopyranyl, benzoxazolyl, indoxazinyl, anthranilyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxanyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzoiuranyl, isobenzoiuranyl, benzothi
  • 3-fused-ring heteroaryls or heterocycloalkyls examples include
  • fused-ring heteroaryls include benzo-fused heteroaryls such as indolyl, isoindolyl (also known as “isobenzazolyl” or “pseudoisoindolyl”), indoleninyl (also known as “pseudoindolyl”), isoindazolyl (also known as “benzpyrazolyl”), benzazinyl (including quinolinyl (also known as “1-benzazinyl”) or isoquinolinyl (also known as "2-benzazinyl”)), phthalazinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, benzodiazinyl (including cinnolinyl (also known as "1,2-benzodiazinyl”) or quinazolinyl (also known as
  • heteroaryl also includes substituents such as pyridyl and quinolinyl that are fused to a C4-C10 carbocyclic ring, such as a C 5 or a C 6 carbocyclic ring, or to a 4-10- membered heterocyclic ring, wherein a group having such a fused aryl group as a substituent is bound to an aromatic carbon of the heteroaryl group or to a heteroatom of the heteroaryl group.
  • the one or more substituents are each bound to an aromatic carbon of the heteroaryl group or to a heteroatom of the heteroaryl group.
  • a substituent is "substitutable” if it comprises at least one carbon, sulfur, oxygen or nitrogen atom that is bonded to one or more hydrogen atoms. Thus, for example, hydrogen, halogen, and cyano do not fall within this definition. If a substituent is described as being “substituted,” a non-hydrogen substituent is in the place of a hydrogen substituent on a carbon, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen of the substituent. Thus, for example, a substituted alkyl substituent is an alkyl substituent wherein at least one non-hydrogen substituent is in the place of a hydrogen substituent on the alkyl substituent.
  • monofluoroalkyl is alkyl substituted with a fluoro substituent
  • difluoroalkyl is alkyl substituted with two fluoro substituents. It should be recognized that if there is more than one substitution on a substituent, each non-hydrogen substituent may be identical or different (unless otherwise stated).
  • a substituent is described as being “optionally substituted,” the substituent may be either (1) not substituted, or (2) substituted. If a carbon of a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with one or more of a list of substituents, one or more of the hydrogens on the carbon (to the extent there are any) may separately and/or together be replaced with an independently selected optional substituent. If a nitrogen of a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with one or more of a list of substituents, one or more of the hydrogens on the nitrogen (to the extent there are any) may each be replaced with an independently selected optional substituent.
  • One exemplary substituent may be depicted as -NR'R," wherein R' and R" together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may form a heterocyclic ring.
  • the heterocyclic ring formed from R' and R" together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached may be partially or fully saturated.
  • the heterocyclic ring consists of 3 to 7 atoms.
  • the heterocyclic ring is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl and thiazolyl.
  • substituents are collectively described as being optionally substituted by one or more of a list of substituents, the group may include: (1) unsubstitutable substituents, (2) substitutable substituents that are not substituted by the optional substituents, and/or (3) substitutable substituents that are substituted by one or more of the optional substituents. If a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with up to a particular number of non-hydrogen substituents, that substituent may be either (1) not substituted; or (2) substituted by up to that particular number of non-hydrogen substituents or by up to the maximum number of substitutable positions on the substituent, whichever is less.
  • any heteroaryl with less than 3 substitutable positions would be optionally substituted by up to only as many non-hydrogen substituents as the heteroaryl has substitutable positions.
  • tetrazolyl which has only one substitutable position
  • an amino nitrogen is described as being optionally substituted with up to 2 non-hydrogen substituents, then the nitrogen will be optionally substituted with up to 2 non-hydrogen substituents if the amino nitrogen is a primary nitrogen, whereas the amino nitrogen will be optionally substituted with up to only 1 non- hydrogen substituent if the amino nitrogen is a secondary nitrogen.
  • substituents When a substituent is comprised of multiple moieties, unless otherwise indicated, it is the intention for the final moiety to serve as the point of attachment to the remainder of the molecule. For example, in a substituent A-B-C, moiety C is attached to the remainder of the molecule. In a substituent A-B-C-D, moiety D is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Similarly, in a substituent amino carbonylmethyl, the methyl moiety is attached to the remainder of the molecule, where the substituent may also be depicted as
  • composition of matter stand equally well for the chemical entities described herein, including all enantiomeric forms, diastereomeric forms, salts, and the like, and the terms “compound” and “composition of matter” are used interchangeably throughout the present specification.
  • compositions Disclosed are the components to be used to prepare the disclosed compositions as well as the compositions themselves to be used within the methods disclosed herein. These and other materials are disclosed herein, and it is understood that when combinations, subsets, interactions, groups, etc. of these materials are disclosed that while specific reference of each various individual and collective combinations and permutation of these compounds may not be explicitly disclosed, each is specifically contemplated and described herein. Thus, if a class of molecules A, B, and C are disclosed as well as a class of molecules D, E, and F and an example of a combination molecule, A-D is disclosed, then even if each is not individually recited each is individually and collectively contemplated meaning
  • any subset or combination of these is also disclosed.
  • the subgroup of A-E, B-F, and C-E would be considered disclosed.
  • This concept applies to all aspects of this application including, but not limited to, steps in methods of making and using the disclosed compositions.
  • steps in methods of making and using the disclosed compositions are a variety of additional steps that can be performed it is understood that each of these additional steps can be performed with any specific embodiment or combination of embodiments of the disclosed methods.
  • Contacting or like terms means bringing into proximity such that a molecular interaction can take place, if a molecular interaction is possible between at least two things, such as molecules, cells, markers, at least a compound or composition, or at least two compositions, or any of these with an article(s) or with a machine.
  • contacting refers to bringing at least two compositions, molecules, articles, or things into contact, i.e., such that they are in proximity to mix or touch.
  • composition A and cultured cell B and pouring solution of composition A over cultured cell B would be bringing solution of composition A in contact with cell culture B.
  • Contacting a cell with a ligand would be bringing a ligand to the cell to ensure the cell have access to the ligand.
  • a cell can be brought into contact with a marker or a molecule, a biosensor, and so forth.
  • compositions have their standard meaning in the art. It is understood that wherever, a particular designation, such as a molecule, substance, marker, cell, or reagent compositions comprising, consisting of, and consisting essentially of these designations are disclosed. Thus, where the particular designation marker is used, it is understood that also disclosed would be compositions comprising that marker, consisting of that marker, or consisting essentially of that marker. Where appropriate wherever a particular designation is made, it is understood that the compound of that designation is also disclosed. For example, if particular biological material, such as EGF, is disclosed EGF in its compound form is also disclosed.
  • EGF biological material
  • control or "control levels” or “control cells” are defined as the standard by which a change is measured, for example, the controls are not subjected to the experiment, but are instead subjected to a defined set of parameters, or the controls are based on pre- or post- treatment levels. They can either be run in parallel with or before or after a test run, or they can be a pre-determined standard.
  • a compound may form a complex such as a "clathrate", a drug-host inclusion complex, wherein, in contrast to solvates, the drug and host are present in stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts.
  • a compound used herein can also contain two or more organic and/or inorganic components which can be in stoichiometric or non- stoichiometric amounts.
  • the resulting complexes can be ionised, partially ionised, or non-ionised.
  • Congestive heart failure is a condition in which the heart's function as a pump to deliver oxygen rich blood to the body is inadequate to meet the body's needs.
  • Congestive heart failure can be caused by diseases that weaken the heart muscle, or diseases that cause stiffening of the heart muscles, or diseases that increase oxygen demand by the body tissue beyond the capability of the heart to deliver. Many diseases can impair the pumping action of the ventricles. For example, the muscles of the ventricles can be weakened by heart attacks or infections (myocarditis). The diminished pumping ability of the ventricles due to muscle weakening is called systolic dysfunction. After each ventricular contraction (systole) the ventricle muscles need to relax to allow blood from the atria to fill the ventricles. This relaxation of the ventricles is called diastole.
  • diastolic dysfunction diseases such as hemochromatosis or amyloidosis can cause stiffening of the heart muscle and impair the ventricles' capacity to relax and fill; this is referred to as diastolic dysfunction.
  • the most common cause of this is longstanding high blood pressure resulting in a thickened (hypertrophied) heart.
  • the pumping action and filling capacity of the heart may be normal, abnormally high oxygen demand by the body's tissues (for example, with hyperthyroidism) may make it difficult for the heart to supply an adequate blood flow (called high output heart failure). In some patients one or more of these factors can be present to cause congestive heart failure.
  • Congestive heart failure can affect many organs of the body.
  • the weakened heart muscles may not be able to supply enough blood to the kidneys, which then begin to lose their normal ability to excrete salt (sodium) and water.
  • This diminished kidney function can cause to body to retain more fluid.
  • the lungs may become congested with fluid (pulmonary edema) and the person's ability to exercise is decreased. Fluid may likewise accumulate in the liver, thereby impairing its ability to rid the body of toxins and produce essential proteins.
  • the intestines may become less efficient in absorbing nutrients and medicines. Over time, untreated, worsening congestive heart failure will affect virtually every organ in the body.
  • Cancer is a disease of inadequately controlled differentiation or division of cells, such as prostate cancer, leukemia, hormone dependent cancers, breast cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, epidermal cancer, liver cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the brain, and cancer of the kidney. Cancer is a collection of diseases that arise from the progressive accumulation of genetic alterations in somatic cells. Cancer is also viewed as a pathway dysregulated disease - a small number of core pathways are dominate in aberrant cell growth leading to cancer. The ability of tumor cells to outgrow their neighboring cells is often driven by constitutive activation of downstream proteins. Genetic studies over several decades have discovered a wide range of tumor- associated genes and their mutations, many of which preferentially occur in signaling proteins involved in a small number of pathways.
  • Genetic mutations are often enriched in positive regulatory loops (gain of function), and methylated genes in negative regulatory loops (loss of function), leading to the disruption of the normal cooperative behavior of cells and thus promoting tumor pheno types.
  • a hallmark in the onset of cancer is how mutated proteins alter and govern signaling of cancer cells in the context of intracellular or intercellular signaling networks.
  • a cross-desensitization DMR assay is a label- free optical biosensor cellular assay that measures the ability of a molecule to desensitize the cellular response mediated by either a hERG activator such as mallotoxin or a GPR35 agonist such as zaprinast or YE210, in a hERG and GPR35 co-expressing cell or a GPR35 expressing cell, wherein the molecule itself also exhibits agonism activity in said cell.
  • a hERG activator such as mallotoxin
  • a GPR35 agonist such as zaprinast or YE210
  • Detect or like terms refer to an ability of the apparatus and methods of the disclosure to discover or sense a molecule- or a marker-induced cellular response and to distinguish the sensed responses for distinct molecules.
  • a "direct action” or like terms is a result (of a drug candidate molecule") acting independently on a cell.
  • a "DMR index” or like terms is a biosensor index made up of a collection of DMR data.
  • a "DMR signal” or like terms refers to the signal of cells measured with an optical biosensor that is produced by the response of a cell upon stimulation.
  • a "DMR response" or like terms is a biosensor response using an optical biosensor.
  • the DMR refers to dynamic mass redistribution or dynamic cellular matter redistribution.
  • a P-DMR is a positive DMR response
  • a N-DMR is a negative DMR response
  • a RP-DMR is a recovery P-DMR response.
  • a disease marker is any reagent, molecule, substance, etc, that can be used for identifying, diagnosing, or prognosing for a GPR35 related disease.
  • a drug candidate molecule or like terms is a test molecule which is being tested for its ability to function as a drug or a pharmacophore. This molecule may be considered as a lead molecule.
  • Efficacy or like terms is the capacity to produce a desired size of an effect under ideal or optimal conditions. It is these conditions that distinguish efficacy from the related concept of effectiveness, which relates to change under real-life conditions. Efficacy is the relationship between receptor occupancy and the ability to initiate a response at the molecular, cellular, tissue or system level.
  • An electrophysiology method is any method which studies the electrical properties of biological cells and tissues. It involves measurements of voltage change or electric current on a wide variety of scales from single ion channel proteins to whole organs like the heart. In neuroscience, it includes measurements of the electrical activity of neurons, and particularly action potential activity. Recordings of large-scale electric signals from the nervous system such as electroencephalography, may also be referred to as
  • An engineered cell is any cell in which one or more genes have been added or removed (via genetic blockage, such as homolgous recombination or siRNAa plasmid) or altered in either a transient or permenant fashion.
  • engineered cell refers to a cell which has been manipulated to comprise exogenous material, such as nucleic acid.
  • exogenous material such as nucleic acid.
  • disclosed herein are engineered cells which have been manipulated to comprise exogenous GPR35, exogenous hERG or both.
  • a "fusion protein” is a protein or a peptide located either on the C- or N- terminal of the target protein, which facilitates one or several of the following characteristics: (1) improved solubility - Fusion of the N-terminus of the target protein to the C-terminus of a soluble fusion partner often improves the solubility of the target protein; (2) improved detection - Fusion of the target protein to either terminus of a short peptide (epitope tag) or protein which is recognized by an antibody (Western blot analysis) or by biophysical methods (e.g.
  • GFP by fluorescence facilitates the detection of the resulting protein during expression or purification; (3) improved purification - Simple purification schemes have been developed for proteins used at either terminus which bind specifically to affinity resins; (4) Localization - Tag, usually located on N-terminus of the target protein, which acts as address for sending protein to a specific cellular compartment; (5) improved Expression (E)- Fusion of the N-terminus of the target protein to the C-terminus of a highly expressed fusion partner results in high level expression of the target protein.
  • a "GPR35 fusion protein” refers to a protein or peptide located either on the C- or N- terminal of the target protein GPR35.
  • GFP-GPR35 fusion protein that the green fluorescent protein (GFP) is located on the N-terminal of GPR35
  • GPR35-GFP fusion protein that GFP is located on the C-terminal of GPR35
  • the tagged protein or peptide can also be located within the intracellular loops of the receptor.
  • a GPR35 -specific moldulator or GPR35 modulator or the like term is any modulator which direct binds to GPR35 and thus modulates the activity of GPR35.
  • a typical GPR35 -specific modulator can modulate GPR35 activity in one of three cellular assays: (1) Ca 2+ mobilization assays in an engineered cell such as HEK-GPR35 with and without co- expressing G q0 5.
  • G q0 5 is a G protein whose activation results in Ca 2+ mobilization, and the G q0 5 protein can be activated by the agonist-induced activation of a non-G q -coupled receptor when expressed in the cell.
  • GPR35 is believed to be a non-G q -coupled receptor, the co- expression of G q0 5 is necessary to detect the GPR35 agonist induced Ca 2+ mobilization signal.
  • Receptor internalization assays Receptor internalization is quick universal to almost all GPCRs.
  • the GPR35 modulator can be an agonist, an antagonist, an inverse agonist, and a biased agonism.
  • Alternative assays such as beta-arrestin translocation assays or gene reporter assays can also be used.
  • a GPR35 expressing cell is any cell which produces a functional GPR35 in the cell membrane of the cell.
  • a GPR35 agonist is any molecule which binds to and thus activates the GPR35 receptor in the cells.
  • a GPR35 antagonist is any molecule that binds but thus inhibits the activity of GPR35 receptor. Examples include, but not limited to, CID2745687 (methyl-5-[(tert- butylcarbamothioylhydrazinylidene)methyl]-l-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-pyrazole-4-carboxylate). 50. Higher and inhibit and like words
  • the terms higher, increases, elevates, or elevation or like terms or variants of these terms refer to increases above basal levels, e.g., as compared a control.
  • the terms low, lower, reduces, decreases or reduction or like terms or variation of these terms refer to decreases below basal levels, e.g., as compared to a control.
  • basal levels are normal in vivo levels prior to, or in the absence of, or addition of a molecule such as an agonist or antagonist to a cell.
  • Inhibit or forms of inhibit or like terms refers to reducing or suppressing.
  • basal levels are normal in vivo levels prior to, or in the absence of, or addition of an agent such as an agonist or antagonist to activity.
  • decreases or increases can be used to describe the binding of a molecule to a receptor.
  • decreases would describe a situation of where the binding could be defined as having a IQ of 10 ⁇ 9 M, if this interaction decreased, meaning the binding lessened, the Ka could decrease to 10 ⁇ 6 M. It is understood that wherever one of these words is used it is also disclosed that it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100%, 500%, or 1000% increased or decreased from a control.
  • inhibitors phosphorylation means hindering or restraining the amount of phosphorylation that takes place relative to a standard or a control.
  • in the presence of the molecule refers to the contact or exposure of the cultured cell with the molecule.
  • the contact or exposure can be taken place before, or at the time, the stimulus is brought to contact with the cell.
  • an index or like terms is a collection of data.
  • an index can be a list, table, file, or catalog that contains one or more modulation profiles. It is understood that an index can be produced from any combination of data.
  • a DMR profile can have a P-DMR, a N-DMR, and a RP-DMR.
  • An index can be produced using the completed date of the profile, the P-DMR data, the N-DMR data, the RP-DMR data, or any point within these, or in combination of these or other data.
  • the index is the collection of any such information.
  • the indexes are of like data, i.e. P-DMR to P-DMR data.
  • Interacts means that two (or more) molecules touch one another in a way beyond the touching that takes place because of random contacts between molecules.
  • Interacts can be thought of as "binding" between two or more molecules, and therefore can have dissociation and association constants as well as equilibrium constants.
  • Inflammation is any specific or non-specific immune response. Inflammation is part of the complex biological response of vascular tissues to harmful stimuli, such as pathogens, damaged cells, or irritants. Inflammation is a protective attempt by the organism to remove the injurious stimuli and to initiate the healing process. Inflammation can be classified as either acute or chronic. Acute inflammation is the initial response of the body to harmful stimuli and is achieved by the increased movement of plasma and leukocytes (especially granulocytes) from the blood into the injured tissues. A cascade of biochemical events propagates and matures the inflammatory response, involving the local vascular system, the immune system, and various cells within the injured tissue. Prolonged
  • inflammation known as chronic inflammation, leads to a progressive shift in the type of cells present at the site of inflammation and is characterized by simultaneous destruction and healing of the tissue from the inflammatory process.
  • a known molecule or like terms is a molecule with known
  • pharmacological/bio logical/physio logical/pathophysio logical activity whose precise mode of action(s) may be known or unknown.
  • a known modulator or like terms is a modulator where at least one of the targets is known with a known affinity.
  • a known modulator could be a GPR35 agonist, a GPR35 antagonist, etc. 58.
  • Known modulator biosensor index is a known modulator biosensor index
  • a "known modulator biosensor index” or like terms is a modulator biosensor index produced by data collected for a known modulator.
  • a known modulator biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the known modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the known modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a "known modulator DMR index” or like terms is a modulator DMR index produced by data collected for a known modulator.
  • a known modulator DMR index can be made up of a profile of the known modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the known modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a known GPR35 agonist is any GPR35 agonist that at the time it is used in an assay was known to be a GPR35 agonist, as shown in any way.
  • a known GPR35 antagonist is any GPR35 antagonist that at the time it is used in an assay was known to be a GPR35 antagonist, as shown in any way. To date, there is a few of GPR35 antagonist reported in literature including CID2745687.
  • a metabolic disorder is a disorder of metabolism, such as diabetes, Type I diabetes, Type II diabetes, inadequate glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, aging, Syndrome X, atherosclerosis, heart disease, stroke, hypertension and peripheral vascular disease.
  • a label free biosensor cellular assay or like terms is any assay that uses a label free biosensor to detect or monitor a cellular response.
  • label and tag refer to its presence as a moiety covalently or non-covalently bound to another residue such as the GPR35-hERG complex, wherein the the label enables the location and or activity of the other residue to be monitored.
  • the label can be fluorescent.
  • a ligand or like terms is a substance or a composition or a molecule that is able to bind to and form a complex with a biomolecule to serve a biological purpose. Actual irreversible covalent binding between a ligand and its target molecule is rare in biological systems.
  • Ligand binding to receptors alters the chemical conformation, i.e., the three dimensional shape of the receptor protein. The conformational state of a receptor protein determines the functional state of the receptor. The tendency or strength of binding is called affinity.
  • Ligands include substrates, blockers, inhibitors, activators, and neurotransmitters.
  • Radioligands are radioisotope labeled ligands, while fluorescent ligands are fluorescent ly tagged ligands; both can be considered as ligands are often used as tracers for receptor biology and biochemistry studies. Ligand and modulator are used interchangeably.
  • a library or like terms is a collection.
  • the library can be a collection of anything disclosed herein.
  • it can be a collection, of indexes, an index library; it can be a collection of profiles, a profile library; or it can be a collection of DMR indexes, a DMR index library;
  • it can be a collection of molecule, a molecule library; it can be a collection of cells, a cell library; it can be a collection of markers, a marker library;
  • a library can be for example, random or non-random, determined or undetermined.
  • disclosed are libraries of DMR indexes or biosensor indexes of known modulators.
  • maintaining refers to continuing a state.
  • maintaining can be refer to less than 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%), 3%), 2%), 1%), or 0.1%) change from a control, such a basal level, often a level in the absence of a treatment or in the presence of treatment with a placebo or standard.
  • Material is the tangible part of something (chemical, biochemical, biological, or mixed) that goes into the makeup of a physical object.
  • a marker or like terms is a ligand which produces a signal in a biosensor cellular assay.
  • the signal is, must also be, characteristic of at least one specific cell signaling pathway(s) and/or at least one specific cellular process(es) mediated through at least one specific target(s).
  • the signal can be positive, or negative, or any combinations (e.g., oscillation).
  • a "marker panel” or like terms is a panel which comprises at least two markers.
  • the markers can be for different pathways, the same pathway, different targets, or even the same targets.
  • a "marker biosensor index” or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a marker.
  • a marker biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the marker acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the marker against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a "marker biosensor index” or like terms is a biosensor DMR index produced by data collected for a marker.
  • a marker DMR index can be made up of a profile of the marker acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the marker against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • molecule refers to performing one or more of the functions of a reference object.
  • a molecule mimic performs one or more of the functions of a molecule.
  • To modulate, or forms thereof, means either increasing, decreasing, or maintaining a cellular activity mediated through a cellular target. It is understood that wherever one of these words is used it is also disclosed that it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100%, 500%, or 1000% increased from a control, or it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%), or 100%) decreased from a control.
  • a modulator or like terms is a ligand that controls the activity of a cellular target. It is a signal modulating molecule binding to a cellular target, such as a target protein. 76. Modulation comparison
  • a "modulation comparison" or like terms is a result of normalizing a primary profile and a secondary profile.
  • a "modulator biosensor index” or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a modulator.
  • a modulator biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a "modulator DMR index” or like terms is a DMR index produced by data collected for a modulator.
  • a modulator DMR index can be made up of a profile of the modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • Modulate the biosensor signal or like terms is to cause changes of the biosensor signal or profile of a cell in response to stimulation with a marker.
  • Modulate the DMR signal or like terms is to cause changes of the DMR signal or profile of a cell in response to stimulation with a marker.
  • molecule refers to a biological or biochemical or chemical entity that exists in the form of a chemical molecule or molecule with a definite molecular weight.
  • a molecule or like terms is a chemical, biochemical or biological molecule, regardless of its size.
  • molecule includes numerous descriptive classes or groups of molecules, such as proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, steroids, organic pharmaceuticals, small molecule, receptors, antibodies, and lipids. When appropriate, one or more of these more descriptive terms (many of which, such as “protein,” themselves describe overlapping groups of molecules) will be used herein because of application of the method to a subgroup of molecules, without detracting from the intent to have such molecules be representative of both the general class "molecules” and the named subclass, such as proteins. Unless specifically indicated, the word “molecule” would include the specific molecule and salts thereof, such as
  • a molecule mixture or like terms is a mixture containing at least two molecules.
  • the two molecules can be, but not limited to, structurally different (i.e., enantiomers), or compositionally different (e.g., protein isoforms, glycoform, or an antibody with different poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) modifications), or structurally and compositionally different (e.g., unpurified natural extracts, or unpurified synthetic compounds).
  • structurally different i.e., enantiomers
  • compositionally different e.g., protein isoforms, glycoform, or an antibody with different poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) modifications
  • structurally and compositionally different e.g., unpurified natural extracts, or unpurified synthetic compounds.
  • a "molecule biosensor index” or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a molecule.
  • a molecule biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the molecule acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the molecule against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a "molecule DMR index” or like terms is a DMR index produced by data collected for a molecule.
  • a molecule biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the molecule acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the molecule against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
  • a "molecule index” or like terms is an index related to the molecule.
  • a molecule-treated cell or like terms is a cell that has been exposed to a molecule.
  • a "molecule modulation index" or like terms is an index to display the ability of the molecule to modulate the biosensor output signals of the panels of markers acting on the panel of cells.
  • the modulation index is generated by normalizing a specific biosensor output signal parameter of a response of a cell upon stimulation with a marker in the presence of a molecule against that in the absence of any molecule.
  • Molecule pharmacology or the like terms refers to the systems cell biology or systems cell pharmacology or mode(s) of action of a molecule acting on a cell.
  • the molecule pharmacology is often characterized by, but not limited, toxicity, ability to influence specific cellular process(es) (e.g., proliferation, differentiation, reactive oxygen species signaling), or ability to modulate a specific cellular target.
  • compositions more than one active therapeutic agent is present. This is called a combination composition.
  • a normal individual therapeutic dose is the dosage that one of the active therapeutic agents is administered at as a single active therapeutic agent.
  • Normalizing or like terms means, adjusting data, or a profile, or a response, for example, to remove at least one common variable. For example, if two responses are generated, one for a marker acting a cell and one for a marker and molecule acting on the cell, normalizing would refer to the action of comparing the marker- induced response in the absence of the molecule and the response in the presence of the molecule, and removing the response due to the marker only, such that the normalized response would represent the response due to the modulation of the molecule against the marker.
  • a modulation comparison is produced by normalizing a primary profile of the marker and a secondary profile of the marker in the presence of a molecule (modulation profile).
  • pharmaceutically acceptable it is meant a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e., the material can be administered to a subject without causing any undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the other components of the pharmaceutical composition in which it is contained.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can be selected to minimize any degradation of the active ingredient and to minimize any adverse side effects in the subject, as would be well known to one of skill in the art.
  • the carrier can be a solid, a liquid, or both, and can be formulated with the compound as a unit-dose composition, for example, a tablet, which can contain, for example, from 0.05% to 100%, from 0.05% to 99%, from 0.05% to 98%, from 0.05% to 97%, from 0.05% to 96%, from 0.05% to 95%, from 0.05% to 94%, from 0.05% to 93%, from 0.05% to 92%, from 0.05% to 91%, from 0.05% to 90%, from 0.05% to 85%, from 0.05% to 80%, from 0.05% to 75%, from 0.05% to 70%, from 0.05% to 65%, from 0.05% to 60%, from 0.05% to 55%, from 0.05% to 50%, from 0.05% to 45%, from 0.05% to 40%, from 0.05% to 35%, from 0.05% to 30%, from 0.05% to 25%, from 0.05% to 20%, from 0.05% to 15%, from 0.05% to 10%, from 0.05%
  • a profile or like terms refers to the data which is collected for a composition, such as a cell.
  • a profile can be collected from a label free biosensor as described herein.
  • a "primary profile” or like terms refers to a biosensor response or biosensor output signal or profile which is produced when a molecule contacts a cell. Typically, the primary profile is obtained after normalization of initial cellular response to the net-zero biosensor signal (i.e., baseline)
  • a "secondary profile" or like terms is a biosensor response or biosensor output signal of cells in response to a marker in the presence of a molecule.
  • a secondary profile can be used as an indicator of the ability of the molecule to modulate the marker-induced cellular response or biosensor response.
  • a “modulation profile” or like terms is the comparison between a secondary profile of the marker in the presence of a molecule and the primary profile of the marker in the absence of any molecule.
  • the comparison can be by, for example, subtracting the primary profile from secondary profile or subtracting the secondary profile from the primary profile or normalizing the secondary profile against the primary profile.
  • a panel or like terms is a predetermined set of specimens (e.g., markers, or cells, or pathways).
  • a panel can be produced from picking specimens from a library.
  • a "positive control” or like terms is a control that shows that the conditions for data collection can lead to data collection.
  • Potentiate, potentiated or like terms refers to an increase of a specific parameter of a biosensor response of a marker in a cell caused by a molecule.
  • a positive modulation means the molecule to cause increase in the biosensor signal induced by the marker.
  • Potency or like terms is a measure of molecule activity expressed in terms of the amount required to produce an effect of given intensity. For example, a highly potent drug evokes a larger response at low concentrations. The potency is proportional to affinity and efficacy. Affinity is the ability of the drug molecule to bind to a receptor.
  • Prodrug or the like terms refers to compounds that when metabolized in vivo, undergo conversion to compounds having the desired pharmacological activity.
  • Prodrugs can be prepared by replacing appropriate functionalities present in pharmacologically active compounds with "pro-moieties" as described, for example, in H. Bundgaar, Design of Prodrugs (1985).
  • Examples of prodrugs include ester, ether or amide derivatives of the compounds herein, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
  • prodrugs see e.g., T. Higuchi and V. Stella "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems," ACS Symposium Series 14 (1975) and E. B. Roche ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design (1987).
  • promoter or like terms is used to designate a region in the genome sequence upstream of a gene transcription start site (TSS), although sequences downstream of TSS may also affect transcription initiation.
  • Promoter elements select the transcription initiation point, transcription specificity and rate.
  • the terms of 'proximal promoter' severe hundreds nucleotides around the TSS
  • 'distal promoter' thousands and more nucleotides upstream of the TSS
  • Both proximal and distal promoters include sets of various elements participating in the complex process of cell-, issue-, organ-, developmental stage- and environmental factors-specific regulation of transcription. Most promoter elements regulating TSS selection are localized in the proximal promoter (PlantProm: a database of plant promoter sequences, Shahmuradov et al. (2003) Nucleic Acids Res.31(1): 114-117).
  • a regulatable promoter is a promoter which can be regulated by another molecule. For instance, the presence or absence of a molecule can either initiate promoter activity or prevent promoter activity.
  • Ranges can be expressed herein as from “about” one particular value, and/or to "about” another particular value. When such a range is expressed, some forms includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent "about,” it will be understood that the particular value constitutes one of the encompassed values. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as “about” that particular value in addition to the value itself.
  • a receptor or like terms is a protein molecule embedded in either the plasma membrane or cytoplasm of a cell, to which a mobile signaling (or "signal") molecule may attach.
  • a molecule which binds to a receptor is called a "ligand,” and may be a peptide (such as a neurotransmitter), a hormone, a pharmaceutical drug, or a toxin, and when such binding occurs, the receptor goes into a conformational change which ordinarily initiates a cellular response.
  • some ligands merely block receptors without inducing any response (e.g. antagonists).
  • Ligand-induced changes in receptors result in physiological changes which constitute the biological activity of the ligands.
  • Reducing the risk of refers to lowering the chance of an event or characteristic to happen. For example, reducing the risk of disease means lowering the chance that disease will occur, for example, in a subject.
  • a "robust biosensor signal” is a biosensor signal whose amplitude(s) is significantly (such as 3x, lOx, 20x, lOOx, or lOOOx) above either the noise level, or the negative control response.
  • the negative control response is often the biosensor response of cells after addition of the assay buffer solution (i.e., the vehicle).
  • the noise level is the biosensor signal of cells without further addition of any solution. It is worthy of noting that the cells are always covered with a solution before addition of any solution.
  • a "robust DMR signal” or like terms is a DMR form of a “robust biosensor signal.”
  • a response or like terms is any reaction to any stimulation.
  • a selectable marker is a molecule used to select the exogenous gene-positive cells during clone selection of a transfection process.
  • the selectable marker can be, but is not limited to, tetracycline, ampicillin, neomycin, G418 or gentamicin. 111.
  • sample or like terms is meant an animal, a plant, a fungus, etc.; a natural product, a natural product extract, etc.; a tissue or organ from an animal; a cell (either within a subject, taken directly from a subject, or a cell maintained in culture or from a cultured cell line); a cell lysate (or lysate fraction) or cell extract; or a solution containing one or more molecules derived from a cell or cellular material (e.g. a polypeptide or nucleic acid), which is assayed as described herein.
  • a sample may also be any body fluid or excretion (for example, but not limited to, blood, urine, stool, saliva, tears, bile) that contains cells or cell components.
  • the compounds disclosed herein may be used in the form of salts derived from inorganic or organic acids.
  • a salt of the compound may be advantageous due to one or more of the salt's physical properties, such as enhanced pharmaceutical stability in differing temperatures and humidities, or a desirable solubility in water or oil.
  • a salt of a compound also may be used as an aid in the isolation, purification, and/or resolution of the compound.
  • a salt is intended to be administered to a patient (as opposed to, for example, being used in an in vitro context)
  • the salt is pharmaceutically acceptable.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt refers to a salt prepared by combining a compound of Formula I or II with an acid whose anion, or a base whose cation, is generally considered suitable for human consumption. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are particularly useful because of their greater aqueous solubility relative to the parent compound.
  • salts of the compounds disclosed herein are non-toxic “pharmaceutically acceptable salts.”
  • Salts encompassed within the term “pharmaceutically acceptable salts” refer to non-toxic salts of the compounds disclosed herein which are generally prepared by reacting the free base with a suitable organic or inorganic acid.
  • Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of the compounds disclosed herein when possible include those derived from inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydrofluoric, boric, fluoroboric, phosphoric, metaphosphoric, nitric, carbonic, sulfonic, and sulfuric acids, and organic acids such as acetic,
  • benzenesulfonic benzoic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glycolic, isothionic, lactic, lactobionic, maleic, malic, methanesulfonic, trifluoromethanesulfonic, succinic, toluenesulfonic, tartaric, and trifluoro acetic acids.
  • Suitable organic acids generally include, for example, aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aromatic, araliphatic, heterocyclic, carboxylic, and sulfonic classes of organic acids.
  • Suitable organic acids include acetate, trifluoro acetate, formate, propionate, succinate, glycolate, gluconate, digluconate, lactate, malate, tartaric acid, citrate, ascorbate, glucuronate, maleate, fumarate, pyruvate, aspartate, glutamate, benzoate, anthranilic acid, mesylate, stearate, salicylate, p-hydroxybenzoate, phenylacetate, mandelate, embonate (pamoate), methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, pantothenate, toluenesulfonate, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, sufanilate, cyclohexylaminosulfonate, algenic acid, ⁇ -hydroxybutyric acid, galactarate, galacturonate, adipate, alginate, buty
  • suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may include alkali metal salts, i.e., sodium or potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts, e.g., calcium or magnesium salts; and salts formed with suitable organic ligands, e.g., quaternary ammonium salts.
  • base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts, including aluminum, arginine, benzathine, choline, diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, meglumine, olamine, tromethamine and zinc salts.
  • Organic salts may be made from secondary, tertiary or quaternary amine salts, such as tromethamine, diethylamine, ⁇ , ⁇ '-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine (N-methylglucamine), and procaine.
  • secondary, tertiary or quaternary amine salts such as tromethamine, diethylamine, ⁇ , ⁇ '-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine (N-methylglucamine), and procaine.
  • Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl (CrC 6 ) halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (i.e., dimethyl, diethyl, dibuytl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (i.e., decyl, lauryl, myristyl, and stearyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides), arylalkyl halides (i.e., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.
  • lower alkyl (CrC 6 ) halides e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides
  • dialkyl sulfates i.e., dimethyl, die
  • hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example, hemisulphate and hemicalcium salts.
  • a "defined pathway" or like terms is a path of a cell from receiving a signal (e.g., an exogenous ligand) to a cellular response (e.g., increased expression of a cellular target).
  • a signal e.g., an exogenous ligand
  • receptor activation caused by ligand binding to a receptor is directly coupled to the cell's response to the ligand.
  • ligand-receptor interactions are not directly linked to the cell's response.
  • the activated receptor must first interact with other proteins inside the cell before the ultimate physiological effect of the ligand on the cell's behavior is produced. Often, the behavior of a chain of several interacting cell proteins is altered following receptor activation.
  • the entire set of cell changes induced by receptor activation is called a signal transduction mechanism or pathway.
  • the signaling pathway can be either relatively simple or quite complicated.
  • Similarity of indexes is a term to express the similarity between two indexes, or among at least three indices, one for a molecule, based on the patterns of indices, and/or a matrix of scores.
  • the matrix of scores are strongly related to their counterparts, such as the signatures of the primary profiles of different molecules in corresponding cells, and the nature and percentages of the modulation profiles of different molecules against each marker. For example, higher scores are given to more-similar characters, and lower or negative scores for dissimilar characters. Because there are only three types of modulation, positive, negative and neutral, found in the molecule modulation index, the similarity matrices are relatively simple. For example, a simple matrix will assign identical modulation (e.g., a positive modulation) a score of +1 and non-identical modulation a score of-1.
  • the "subject” can include, for example, domesticated animals, such as cats, dogs, etc., livestock (e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.), laboratory animals (e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, etc.) mammals, non-human mammals, primates, non-human primates, rodents, birds, reptiles, amphibians, fish, and any other animal.
  • livestock e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.
  • laboratory animals e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, etc.
  • mammals non-human mammals
  • primates primates
  • non-human primates rodents
  • birds reptiles, amphibians, fish, and any other animal.
  • the subject can be a mammal such as a primate or a human.
  • the subject can also be a non-human. 116.
  • the compounds herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may exist in a continuum of solid states ranging from fully amorphous to fully crystalline. They may also exist in unsolvated and solvated forms.
  • solvate describes a molecular complex comprising the compound and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules (e.g., EtOH).
  • solvent molecules e.g., EtOH
  • hydrate is a solvate in which the solvent is water.
  • solvates include those in which the solvent may be isotopically substituted (e.g., D 2 0, d6-acetone, d6-DMSO).
  • a currently accepted classification system for solvates and hydrates of organic compounds is one that distinguishes between isolated site, channel, and metal-ion
  • Isolated site solvates and hydrates are ones in which the solvent (e.g., water) molecules are isolated from direct contact with each other by intervening molecules of the organic compound.
  • the solvent molecules lie in lattice channels where they are next to other solvent molecules.
  • metal-ion coordinated solvates the solvent molecules are bonded to the metal ion.
  • the complex When the solvent or water is tightly bound, the complex will have a well-defined stoichiometry independent of humidity. When, however, the solvent or water is weakly bound, as in channel solvates and in hygroscopic compounds, the water or solvent content will depend on humidity and drying conditions. In such cases, non-stoichiometry will be the norm.
  • the compounds herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may also exist as multi- component complexes (other than salts and solvates) in which the compound and at least one other component are present in stoichiometric or non- stoichiomethc amounts.
  • Complexes of this type include clathrates (drug-host inclusion complexes) and co-crystals. The latter are typically defined as crystalline complexes of neutral molecular constituents which are bound together through non-covalent interactions, but could also be a complex of a neutral molecule with a salt.
  • Co-crystals may be prepared by melt crystallization, by recrystallization from solvents, or by physically grinding the components together. See, e.g., O. Almarsson and M. J. Zaworotko, Chem. Commun., 17: 1889-1896 (2004).
  • the term “stable” or like terms is generally understood in the art as meaning less than a certain amount, usually 10%, loss of the active ingredient under specified storage conditions for a stated period of time.
  • the time required for a composition to be considered stable is relative to the use of each product and is dictated by the commercial practicalities of producing the product, holding it for quality control and inspection, shipping it to a wholesaler or direct to a customer where it is held again in storage before its eventual use. Including a safety factor of a few months time, the minimum product life for pharmaceuticals is usually one year, and can be more than 18 months.
  • the term “stable” references these market realities and the ability to store and transport the product at readily attainable environmental conditions such as refrigerated conditions, 2°C to 8°C.
  • a substance or like terms is any physical object.
  • a material is a substance.
  • Molecules, ligands, markers, cells, proteins, and DNA can be considered substances.
  • a machine or an article would be considered to be made of substances, rather than considered a substance themselves.
  • test molecule or like terms is a molecule which is used in a method to gain some information about the test molecule.
  • a test molecule can be an unknown or a known molecule.
  • Tissue or like terms refers to a collection of cells. Typically a tissue is obtained from a subject.
  • treating or “treatment” is meant the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • active treatment that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder
  • causal treatment that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • reduced means relative to the state of the disease, including the molecular state of the disease, not just the physiological state of the disease.
  • a treatment can inadvertently cause harm.
  • palliative treatment that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder
  • preventative treatment that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder
  • supportive treatment that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder.
  • treatment can mean a reduction or one or more symptoms or characteristics by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 99%, 99.9%, 99.99%, 100%, relative to a control.
  • preventing refers to the ability of a compound or composition (such as the disclosed compounds and compositions) to prevent a disease identified herein in patients diagnosed as having the disease or who are at risk of developing such disease. In this context, preventing includes the delaying the onset of the disease relative to a control. These terms do not require that the treatment in fact be effective to produce any of the intended results. It is enough that the results are intended.
  • a therapeutic agent or like term is any molecule or composition in which the molecule or composition is useful in preventing or treating conditions or diseases within the therapeutic field.
  • anti-cancer agents can be any agent that can prevent the formation of cancer cell in a subject, reduce the number of cancer cells in a subject, or eliminate all cancer cells in a subject.
  • compositions used are of sufficient quantity to treat a subject as defined herein.
  • Toxicity is the degree to which a substance, molecule, is able to damage something, such as a cell, a tissue, an organ, or a whole organism, that has been exposed to the substance or molecule.
  • something such as a cell, a tissue, an organ, or a whole organism, that has been exposed to the substance or molecule.
  • the liver, or cells in the liver, hepatocytes can be damaged by certain substances.
  • a toxicity marker is any reagent, molecule, substance etc. that can be used for identifying, diagnosing, prognosing a level of toxicity of a substance, in for example, an organism or cell or tissue or organ.
  • Transactivate refers to the process that the activation of a receptor in a cell can also activate another receptor in the same cell.
  • Such transactivation can be direct (i.e., both receptors form a complex such as dimer or oligomer, such that the activation of the 1 st receptor cause a conformational change in the 2 nd receptor, thus leading to the activation of the 2 nd receptor) or indirect (i.e., the two receptors are not necessarily within a signaling complex; however, the activation of 1 st receptor leads to a pathway in which a signaling protein within the pathway activates the 2 nd receptor).
  • a trigger or like terms refers to the act of setting off or initiating an event, such as a response.
  • compositions, apparatus, and methods of the disclosure include those having any value or any combination of the values, specific values, more specific values, and preferred values described herein.
  • the disclosed methods, compositions, articles, and machines can be combined in a manner to comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of, the various components, steps, molecules, and composition, and the like, discussed herein. They can be used, for example, in methods for characterizing a molecule including a ligand as defined herein; a method of producing an index as defined herein; or a method of drug discovery as defined herein.
  • An unknown molecule or like terms is a molecule with unknown
  • X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
  • a weight percent of a component is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.
  • modulation of GPR35 activity treats disease in a subject. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity treats disease in a subject.
  • modulation of GPR35 activity reduces the risk of disease in a subject. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity reduces the risk of and/or treats disease in a subject. In some embodiments the disease is pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
  • modulation of GPR35 activity reduces GPR35 activity. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity increases GPR35 activity.
  • R 1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when
  • R 1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy can be linked via an amide, ether or ester moiety to another substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R 1 when R 1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl.
  • R 1 when R 1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 3 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C 1 -C 3 alkenyl.
  • R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - NO 2 , -SO 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R , R R R' and R° are not -H. In some embodiments R is present and at least one of R ,
  • R R R' and R° are not -H.
  • R is present and at least two of R , R , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are not -H.
  • R 1 is present and at least three of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are not -H.
  • R 1 is present and at least four of R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are not -H.
  • R 1 is present R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are not -H.
  • R 2 can be -H or halide. In some embodiments R 2 can be alkyl or -COOH. In some embodiments R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can be -H, -OH, halide or substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl. In some embodiments R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can be -H or - OH. In some embodiments R 3 or R 4 can be -SO 2 NH 3 . In some embodiments R 3 or R 4 can be -O-aryl. In some embodiments R 3 or R 4 can be -OH. In some embodiments R 3 and R 4 can be -OH. In some embodiments R 5 can be -H or -OH. In some embodiments R 5 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl.
  • R 1 is absent and R 2 , R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 are each individually -H, -OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -SO 2 NH 3 or substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl.
  • R 1 is absent and R 2 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or -COOH.
  • R 1 is absent and R 5 can be -H or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.
  • R 3 and R 4 optionally together form a cyclic moiety. In some embodiments R 3 and R 4 optionally together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl. In some embodiments R 3 and R 4 optionally together form a substituted heterocyclyl.
  • R 1 can be present and be substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkenyl and R 2 R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can be -H, OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, wherein at least two of R 2 R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 cannot be -H.
  • R 1 can be absent and R 3 and R 4 optionally together form substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl.
  • R can be absent and R 2 R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 can be -H, OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH- alkyl, wherein at least two of R 2 R 3 , R 4 , R 5 and R 6 cannot be -H.
  • R 8 can be -H, -OH, -N0 2 , -S0 2 (NH 3 ), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
  • R can be -H, -OH or -COOH.
  • R 8 can be -OH.
  • R 8 can be -H.
  • R 7 , R 9 , R 10 , R 11 and R 12 can each individually be -H, -OH, -NO 2 , -SO 2 NH 3 , -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
  • R 7 can be -H, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • R 7 can be -COOH. In some embodiments R 7 can be substituted or
  • R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl.
  • R 7 and R 8 optionally together can form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl. In some embodiments R 7 and R 8 optionally together can form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • R 9 , R 10 , R 11 and R 12 can be -H, -OH or substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In some embodiments R 10 and R 11 can be -OH when R 9 and R 12 are -H. In some embodiments R 9 R 10 and R 11 can be -OH when R 12 is -H. In some embodiments R 9 and R can be -OH when R 10 and R 12 are -H. In some embodiments R can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • X can be -C(O)-, -CHR 13 -, -0-, -S-or -NR 14 -. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -S- or -NH-. In some embodiments X can be -0-.
  • Y can be present or absent. In some embodiments Y can be present and be -C(O)-, -CHR 15 -, -0-, -S-, or -NR 16 . In some embodiments Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments Y can be absent.
  • X can be -S- or -NH- and Y can be absent. In some embodiments X can be -S- or -NH- and Y can be absent and R 7 can be -COOH. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)- and Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)- and Y can be present and be -C(O)- and R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl. In some embodiments X can be -O- and Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -O- and Y can be present and be - C(O)- and R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R can be -OH.
  • R 13 can be -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R 13 can be -H.
  • R 14 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R 14 can be -H.
  • R 15 can be -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R 15 can be -H.
  • R 16 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R 16 can be -H.
  • Formula II can have the structure:
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 7 and R 8 can together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl and R 8 can be -OH.
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R can be
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R 8 , R 9 and R 11 can be -OH.
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • Formula II can have the structure
  • R 9 can be -OH and R 11 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
  • Formula II can have the structure:
  • Formula II can have the structure:
  • Formula II can have the structure:
  • X can be -S- or -NH- and R 11 and R 12 can be -OH.
  • Formula I or II can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be metal chelating forms.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be Cu 2+ , or Zn 2+ chelating forms.
  • the pharmaceutically acceptable salt for compounds having -COOH can be Cu(II) or Zn(II) chelating forms.
  • the disease can be pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
  • Formula I or II can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof and the disease can be
  • Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof can be a GPR35 modulator.
  • the GPR35 modulator can be a GPR35 agonist.
  • the GPR35 modulator can be a GPR35 antagonist.
  • the disease can be selected from the group consisting of inflammation, metabolic disorder, congestive heart failure, and cancer.
  • the disease can be selected from the group consisting of inflammation, metabolic disorder, congestive heart failure, and cancer.
  • the disease can be a metabolic disorder.
  • the metabolic disorder can be selected from the group consisting of diabetes, Type I diabetes, Type II diabetes, inadequate glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, hyper lipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, aging, Syndrome X, atherosclerosis, heart disease, stroke, hypertension and peripheral vascular disease.
  • the disease can be cancer.
  • the cancer can be selected from the group consisting of prostate cancer, leukemia, hormone dependent cancers, breast cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, epidermal cancer, liver cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the brain, and cancer of the kidney.
  • Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered by one or more routes selected from a group consisting of rectal, buccal, sublingual, intravenous, subcutaneous, intradermal, transdermal, intraperitoneal, oral, eye drops, parenteral and topical administration.
  • Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered orally.
  • Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered
  • Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof can be administered rectally. In some embodiments Formula I or II or a
  • the subject can be diagnosed with a disease
  • the subject can be in need of a drug for a disease pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
  • the subject can be administered a therapeutically effective amount of Formula I or II.
  • the subject is at risk of having a disease pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
  • compositions of Formula I or II are also disclosed herein. 1. Administration
  • the disclosed compounds can be administered by any suitable route, in the form of a pharmaceutical composition adapted to such a route, and in a dose effective for the treatment or prevention intended.
  • the active compounds and compositions for example, can be administered orally, rectally, parenterally, ocularly, inhalationaly, or topically.
  • Oral administration of a solid dose form can be, for example, presented in discrete units, such as hard or soft capsules, pills, cachets, lozenges, or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of at least one of the disclosed compound or
  • the oral administration can be in a powder or granule form.
  • the oral dose form is sub-lingual, such as, for example, a lozenge.
  • the compounds of Formula I are ordinarily combined with one or more adjuvants.
  • Such capsules or tablets can contain a controlled-release formulation.
  • the dosage forms also can comprise buffering agents or can be prepared with enteric coatings.
  • oral administration can be in a liquid dose form.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs containing inert diluents commonly used in the art (e.g., water).
  • Such compositions also can comprise adjuvants, such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, flavoring (e.g., sweetening), and/or perfuming agents.
  • compositions can comprise a parenteral dose form.
  • Parenteral administration includes, for example, subcutaneous injections, intravenous injections, intraperitoneally, intramuscular injections, intrasternal injections, and infusion.
  • injectable preparations e.g., sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions
  • suitable dispersing, wetting agents, and/or suspending agents can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents, and/or suspending agents.
  • compositions can include a topical dose form.
  • Topical administration includes, for example, transdermal administration, such as via transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices, intraocular administration, or intranasal or inhalation administration.
  • Compositions for topical administration also include, for example, topical gels, sprays, ointments, and creams.
  • a topical formulation can include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. When the compounds and compositions are administered by a transdermal device, administration will be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir and porous membrane type or of a solid matrix variety.
  • Typical formulations for this purpose include gels, hydrogels, lotions, solutions, creams, ointments, dusting powders, dressings, foams, films, skin patches, wafers, implants, sponges, fibres, bandages and microemulsions.
  • Liposomes can also be used.
  • Typical carriers include alcohol, water, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, glycerin, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol.
  • Penetration enhancers can be incorporated - see, for example, J Pharm Sci, 88 (10), 955-958, by Finnin and Morgan (October 1999).
  • Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye include, for example, eye drops wherein the disclosed compound or composition is dissolved or suspended in suitable carrier.
  • a typical formulation suitable for ocular or aural administration can be in the form of drops of a micronised suspension or solution in isotonic, pH-adjusted, sterile saline.
  • Other formulations suitable for ocular and aural administration include ointments, biodegradable (e.g. absorbable gel sponges, collagen) and non-biodegradable (e.g. silicone) implants, wafers, lenses and particulate or vesicular systems, such as niosomes or liposomes.
  • a polymer such as crossed- linked polyacrylic acid, polyvinylalcohol, hyaluronic acid, a cellulosic polymer, for example, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, or methyl cellulose, or a heteropolysaccharide polymer, for example, gelan gum, can be incorporated together with a preservative, such as benzalkonium chloride.
  • a preservative such as benzalkonium chloride.
  • Such formulations can also be delivered by iontophoresis.
  • the active disclosed compounds are conveniently delivered in the form of a solution or suspension from a pump spray container that is squeezed or pumped by the patient or as an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurized container or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant.
  • Formulations suitable for intranasal administration are typically administered in the form of a dry powder (either alone, as a mixture, for example, in a dry blend with lactose, or as a mixed component particle, for example, mixed with phospholipids, such as phosphatidylcholine) from a dry powder inhaler or as an aerosol spray from a pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser (an atomiser using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist), or nebuliser, with or without the use of a suitable propellant, such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1,1,1,2,3,3,3- heptaf uoropropane.
  • a suitable propellant such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1,1,1,2,3,3,3- heptaf uoropropane.
  • the powder can comprise a bioadhesive agent, for example, chitosan or cyclodextrin.
  • a bioadhesive agent for example, chitosan or cyclodextrin.
  • the disclosed compositions can comprise a rectal dose form.
  • Such rectal dose form can be in the form of, for example, a suppository. Cocoa butter is a traditional suppository base, but various alternatives can be used as appropriate.
  • compositions can be prepared by any of the well-known techniques of pharmacy, such as effective formulation and administration procedures.
  • effective formulations and administration procedures are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks.
  • Formulation of drugs is discussed in, for example, Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania, 1975; Liberman, et al, Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N.Y., 1980; and Kibbe, et al, Eds., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (3 rd Ed.), American Pharmaceutical Association, Washington, 1999.
  • the disclosed compounds of Formula I or II can be used, alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents, in the treatment or reduction of risk of various conditions or disease states.
  • the disclosed compound(s) and composition(s) of Formula I or II and other therapeutic agent(s) can be administered simultaneously (either in the same dosage form or in separate dosage forms) or sequentially.
  • An exemplary therapeutic agent can be, for example, one selected from the group consisting of anti-inflammation agent, anti-metabolic-disorder agent, anti-congestive-heart-failure agent, anti-cancer agent, kynurenic acid, NPPB, zaprinast, lysophosphatidic acid (LP A) and a compound of Formula I or II as presently disclosed.
  • an anti-cancer agent and a compound of Formula I or II can be administered together or in combination.
  • the administration of two or more compounds "in combination" means that the two compounds are administered closely enough in time that the presence of one alters the biological effects of the other.
  • the two or more compounds can be administered
  • simultaneous administration can be carried out by mixing the compounds prior to administration or by administering the compounds at the same point in time but at different anatomic sites or using different routes of administration.
  • simultaneous administration can be carried out by mixing the compounds prior to administration or by administering the compounds at the same point in time but at different anatomic sites or using different routes of administration.
  • “simultaneous administration,” and “administered simultaneously” mean that the compounds are administered in combination.
  • the dosage regimen for the compounds and/or compositions containing the compounds can be based on a variety of factors, including the type, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the patient; the severity of the condition; the route of administration; and the activity of the particular compound employed. Thus the dosage regimen can vary widely. Dosage levels of the order from about 0.001 mg to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day are useful in the treatment or prevention of the above-indicated conditions.
  • Other effective dosages regimens of a disclosed compounds include but are not limited to: from about 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg/day, from about 0.1 to about 50 mg/kg/day, from about 0.5 to about 30 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg/day, and from about 0.1 to about 1.0 mg/kg/day.
  • Dosage unit compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. In many instances, the administration of the compound will be repeated a plurality of times in a day. Multiple doses per day typically can be used to increase the total daily dose, if desired.
  • compositions can be provided in the form of tablets containing 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250 and 500 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient.
  • a medicament typically contains from about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg of the active ingredient, or from about 1 mg to about 100 mg of active ingredient.
  • doses can range from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg/minute during a constant rate infusion.
  • compositions comprising an effective amount of a compound disclosed herein or a pharmaceutically accepted salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof; and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle. These compositions can further comprise additional agents. These compositions are useful for modulating the activity of GPR35, thus to improve the prevention and treatment of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders.
  • compositions described in the methods herein can be administered adjunctively with other active compounds.
  • active compounds include but are not limited to analgesics, anti-inflammatory drugs, antipyretics, antidepressants,
  • antiepileptics as used herein, means the compounds or compositions can be administered in the same dosage form or in separate dosage forms with one or more other active agents.
  • compounds that can be adjunctively administered with a compound of Formula I or II as presently disclosed include, but are not limited to, aceclofenac, acetaminophen, adomexetine, almotriptan, alprazolam, amantadine, amcinonide, aminocyclopropane, amitriptyline, amolodipine, amoxapine, amphetamine, aripiprazole, aspirin, atomoxetine, azasetron, azatadine, beclomethasone, benactyzine, benoxaprofen, bermoprofen, betamethasone, bicifadine, bromocriptine, budesonide, buprenorphine, bupropion, buspirone, butorphanol, butriptyline, caffeine, carbamazepine, carbidopa, carisoprodol, celecoxib, chlordiaze
  • methamphetamine methocarbamol, methyldopa, methylphenidate, methylsalicylate, methysergid(e), metoclopramide, mianserin, mifepristone, milnacipran, minaprine, mirtazapine, moclobemide, modafinil (an anti-narcoleptic), molindone, morphine, morphine hydrochloride, nabumetone, nadolol, naproxen, naratriptan, nefazodone, neurontin, nomifensine, nortriptyline, olanzapine, olsalazine, ondansetron, opipramol, orphenadrine, oxaflozane, oxaprazin, oxazepam, oxitriptan, oxycodone, oxymorphone, pancrelipase, parecoxib, paroxetine,
  • compositions described herein can be formulated for controlled release including immediate release, delayed release, extended release, pulsatile release, and combinations thereof.
  • the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II, and optional one or more additional active agents can be incorporated into microparticles, nanoparticles, or combinations thereof that provide controlled release of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and/or one or more additional active agents.
  • the formulations contains two or more drugs
  • the drugs can be formulated for the same type of controlled release (e.g., delayed, extended, immediate, or pulsatile) or the drugs can be independently formulated for different types of release (e.g., immediate and delayed, immediate and extended, delayed and extended, delayed and pulsatile, etc.).
  • compounds of Formula I or II and/or one or more additional active agents can be incorporated into polymeric microparticles which provide controlled release of the drug(s). Release of the drug(s) is controlled by diffusion of the drug(s) out of the microparticles and/or degradation of the polymeric particles by hydrolysis and/or enzymatic degradation.
  • Suitable polymers include ethylcellulose and other natural or synthetic cellulose derivatives.
  • Polymers which are slowly soluble and form a gel in an aqueous environment, such as hydroxypropyl methylcellulose or polyethylene oxide may also be suitable as materials for drug containing microparticles.
  • polymers include, but are not limited to, polyanhydrides, poly(ester anhydrides), polyhydroxy acids, such as polylactide (PLA), polyglycolide (PGA), poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), poly-3-hydroxybutyrate (PHB) and copolymers thereof, poly-4-hydroxybutyrate (P4HB) and copolymers thereof,
  • the drug(s) can be incorporated into microparticles prepared from materials which are insoluble in aqueous solution or slowly soluble in aqueous solution, but are capable of degrading within the GI tract by means including enzymatic degradation, surfactant action of bile acids, and/or mechanical erosion.
  • slowly soluble in water refers to materials that are not dissolved in water within a period of 30 minutes. Examples include fats, fatty substances, waxes, wax-like substances and mixtures thereof.
  • Suitable fats and fatty substances include fatty alcohols (such as lauryl, myristyl stearyl, cetyl or cetostearyl alcohol), fatty acids and derivatives, including but not limited to fatty acid esters, fatty acid glycerides (mono-, di- and tri-glycerides), and hydrogenated fats.
  • fatty alcohols such as lauryl, myristyl stearyl, cetyl or cetostearyl alcohol
  • fatty acids and derivatives including but not limited to fatty acid esters, fatty acid glycerides (mono-, di- and tri-glycerides), and hydrogenated fats.
  • Specific examples include, but are not limited to hydrogenated vegetable oil, hydrogenated cottonseed oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated oils available under the trade name Sterotex®, stearic acid, cocoa butter, and stearyl alcohol.
  • Suitable waxes and wax-like materials include natural or synthetic waxes, hydrocarbons, and normal wax
  • waxes include beeswax, glycowax, castor wax, carnauba wax, paraffins and candelilla wax.
  • a wax-like material is defined as any material which is normally solid at room temperature and has a melting point of from about 30 to 300°C.
  • rate-controlling (wicking) agents may be formulated along with the fats or waxes listed above.
  • rate-controlling materials include certain starch derivatives (e.g., waxy maltodextrin and drum dried corn starch), cellulose derivatives (e.g., hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, hydro xypropylcellulose, methylcellulose, and
  • Proteins which are water insoluble such as zein, can also be used as materials for the formation of drug containing microparticles. Additionally, proteins, polysaccharides and combinations thereof which are water soluble can be formulated with drug into microparticles and subsequently cross-linked to form an insoluble network. For example, cyclodextrins can be complexed with individual drug molecules and subsequently cross-linked.
  • Encapsulation or incorporation of drug into carrier materials to produce drug containing microparticles can be achieved through known pharmaceutical formulation techniques.
  • the carrier material is typically heated above its melting temperature and the drug is added to form a mixture comprising drug particles suspended in the carrier material, drug dissolved in the carrier material, or a mixture thereof.
  • Microparticles can be subsequently formulated through several methods including, but not limited to, the processes of congealing, extrusion, spray chilling or aqueous dispersion. Wax can be heated above its melting temperature, drug is added, and the molten wax-drug mixture is congealed under constant stirring as the mixture cools. Alternatively, the molten wax-drug mixture can be extruded and spheronized to form pellets or beads. These processes are known in the art.
  • carrier materials it may be desirable to use a solvent evaporation technique to produce drug containing microparticles.
  • drug and carrier material are co-dissolved in a mutual solvent and microparticles can subsequently be produced by several techniques including, but not limited to, forming an emulsion in water or other appropriate media, spray drying or by evaporating off the solvent from the bulk solution and milling the resulting material.
  • drug in a particulate form is homogeneously dispersed in a water-insoluble or slowly water soluble material.
  • the drug powder itself may be milled to generate fine particles prior to formulation.
  • the process of jet milling known in the pharmaceutical art, can be used for this purpose.
  • drug in a particulate form is homogeneously dispersed in a wax or wax like substance by heating the wax or wax like substance above its melting point and adding the drug particles while stirring the mixture.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant may be added to the mixture to facilitate the dispersion of the drug particles.
  • the particles can also be coated with one or more modified release coatings.
  • Solid esters of fatty acids which are hydrolyzed by lipases, can be spray coated onto microparticles or drug particles.
  • Zein is an example of a naturally water-insoluble protein. It can be coated onto drug containing microparticles or drug particles by spray coating or by wet granulation techniques.
  • some substrates of digestive enzymes can be treated with cross-linking procedures, resulting in the formation of non-soluble networks.
  • Many methods of cross-linking proteins, initiated by both chemical and physical means, have been reported. One of the most common methods to obtain cross-linking is the use of chemical cross-linking agents.
  • cross-linking agents examples include aldehydes (gluteraldehyde and formaldehyde), epoxy compounds, carbodiimides, and genipin.
  • aldehydes gluteraldehyde and formaldehyde
  • epoxy compounds carbodiimides
  • genipin examples include aldehydes (gluteraldehyde and formaldehyde), epoxy compounds, carbodiimides, and genipin.
  • oxidized and native sugars have been used to cross-link gelatin.
  • Cross-linking can also be accomplished using enzymatic means; for example, transglutaminase has been approved as a GRAS substance for cross-linking seafood products.
  • cross-linking can be initiated by physical means such as thermal treatment, UV irradiation and gamma irradiation.
  • a water soluble protein can be spray coated onto the microparticles and subsequently cross-linked by the one of the methods described above.
  • drug containing microparticles can be microencapsulated within protein by coacervation-phase separation (for example, by the addition of salts) and subsequently cross- linked.
  • suitable proteins for this purpose include gelatin, albumin, casein, and gluten.
  • Polysaccharides can also be cross-linked to form a water-insoluble network. For many polysaccharides, this can be accomplished by reaction with calcium salts or multivalent cations which cross-link the main polymer chains. Pectin, alginate, dextran, amylose and guar gum are subject to cross-linking in the presence of multivalent cations. Complexes between oppositely charged polysaccharides can also be formed; pectin and chitosan, for example, can be complexed via electrostatic interactions.
  • this can be accomplished using drip systems, such as by intravenous administration.
  • drip systems such as by intravenous administration.
  • repeated application can be done or a patch can be used to provide continuous administration of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II over an extended period of time.
  • compositions having Formula I or II described herein can be incorporated into injectable/implantable solid or semi-solid implants, such as polymeric implants.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II are incorporated into a polymer that is a liquid or paste at room temperature, but upon contact with aqueous medium, such as physiological fluids, exhibits an increase in viscosity to form a semi-solid or solid material.
  • exemplary polymers include, but are not limited to,
  • hydro xyalkanoic acid polyesters derived from the copolymerization of at least one unsaturated hydroxy fatty acid copolymerized with hydroxyalkanoic acids.
  • the polymer can be melted, mixed with the active substance and cast or injection molded into a device. Such melt fabrication require polymers having a melting point that is below the temperature at which the substance to be delivered and polymer degrade or become reactive.
  • the device can also be prepared by solvent casting where the polymer is dissolved in a solvent and the drug dissolved or dispersed in the polymer solution and the solvent is then evaporated. Solvent processes require that the polymer be soluble in organic solvents. Another method is compression molding of a mixed powder of the polymer and the drug or polymer particles loaded with the active agent.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II can be incorporated into a polymer matrix and molded, compressed, or extruded into a device that is a solid at room temperature.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II can be incorporated into a polymer matrix and molded, compressed, or extruded into a device that is a solid at room temperature.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II can be incorporated into a polymer matrix and molded, compressed, or extruded into a device that is a solid at room temperature.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II can be incorporated into a polymer matrix and molded, compressed, or extruded into a device that is a solid at room temperature.
  • I or II can be incorporated into a biodegradable polymer, such as polyanhydrides,
  • PHAs polyhydroalkanoic acids
  • PLA PLA
  • PGA PGA
  • PLGA polycapro lactone
  • polyesters polyamides
  • polyort ho esters polyphosphazenes
  • proteins and polysaccharides such as collagen, hyaluronic acid, albumin and gelatin, and combinations thereof and compressed into solid device, such as disks, or extruded into a device, such as rods.
  • Suitable oral dosage forms include tablets, capsules, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and lozenges. Tablets can be made using compression or molding techniques well known in the art. Gelatin or non-gelatin capsules can prepared as hard or soft capsule shells, which can encapsulate liquid, solid, and semi-solid fill materials, using techniques well known in the art.
  • Formulations may be prepared using a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
  • carrier includes, but is not limited to, diluents, preservatives, binders, lubricants, disintegrators, swelling agents, fillers, stabilizers, and combinations thereof.
  • Carrier also includes all components of the coating composition which may include plasticizers, pigments, colorants, stabilizing agents, and glidants. Delayed release dosage formulations may be prepared as described in standard references. These references provide information on carriers, materials, equipment and process for preparing tablets and capsules and delayed release dosage forms of tablets, capsules, and granules.
  • suitable coating materials include, but are not limited to, cellulose polymers such as cellulose acetate phthalate, hydro xypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate and hydroxypropyl
  • methylcellulose acetate succinate polyvinyl acetate phthalate, acrylic acid polymers and copolymers, and methacrylic resins that are commercially available under the trade name EUDRAGIT® (Roth Pharma, Westerstadt, Germany), zein, shellac, and polysaccharides.
  • the coating material may contain conventional carriers such as plasticizers, pigments, colorants, glidants, stabilization agents, pore formers and surfactants.
  • Optional pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include, but are not limited to, diluents, binders, lubricants, disintegrants, colorants, stabilizers, and surfactants.
  • Diluents also referred to as "fillers,” are typically necessary to increase the bulk of a solid dosage form so that a practical size is provided for compression of tablets or formation of beads and granules.
  • Suitable diluents include, but are not limited to, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, cellulose, micro crystalline cellulose, kaolin, sodium chloride, dry starch, hydrolyzed starches, pregelatinized starch, silicone dioxide, titanium oxide, magnesium aluminum silicate and powdered sugar.
  • Binders are used to impart cohesive qualities to a solid dosage formulation, and thus ensure that a tablet or bead or granule remains intact after the formation of the dosage forms.
  • Suitable binder materials include, but are not limited to, starch, prege latinized starch, gelatin, sugars (including sucrose, glucose, dextrose, lactose and sorbitol), polyethylene glycol, waxes, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, tragacanth, sodium alginate, cellulose, including hydro xypropylmethylcellulose, hydro xypropylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and veegum, and synthetic polymers such as acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymers, polyacrylic acid/polymethacrylic acid and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
  • Lubricants are used to facilitate tablet manufacture.
  • suitable lubricants include, but are not limited to, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, glycerol behenate, polyethylene glycol, talc, and mineral oil.
  • Disintegrants are used to facilitate dosage form disintegration or "breakup" after administration, and generally include, but are not limited to, starch, sodium starch glycolate, sodium carboxymethyl starch, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, pregelatinized starch, clays, cellulose, alginine, gums or cross linked polymers, such as cross- linked PVP (Polyplasdone® XL from GAF Chemical Corp).
  • starch sodium starch glycolate, sodium carboxymethyl starch, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, pregelatinized starch, clays, cellulose, alginine, gums or cross linked polymers, such as cross- linked PVP (Polyplasdone® XL from GAF Chemical Corp).
  • Stabilizers are used to inhibit or retard drug decomposition reactions which include, by way of example, oxidative reactions.
  • Suitable stabilizers include, but are not limited to, antioxidants, butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT); ascorbic acid, its salts and esters; Vitamin E, tocopherol and its salts; sulfites such as sodium metabisulphite; cysteine and its derivatives; citric acid; propyl gallate, and butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA).
  • Oral dosage forms such as capsules, tablets, solutions, and suspensions, can for formulated for controlled release.
  • compositions having Formula I or II and optional one or more additional active agents can be formulated into nanoparticles, microparticles, and combinations thereof, and encapsulated in a soft or hard gelatin or non-gelatin capsule or dispersed in a dispersing medium to form an oral suspension or syrup.
  • the particles can be formed of the drug and a controlled release polymer or matrix.
  • the drug particles can be coated with one or more controlled release coatings prior to incorporation in to the finished dosage form.
  • the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and optional one or more additional active agents are dispersed in a matrix material, which gels or emulsifies upon contact with an aqueous medium, such as
  • the matrix swells entrapping the active agents, which are released slowly over time by diffusion and/or degradation of the matrix material.
  • Such matrices can be formulated as tablets or as fill materials for hard and soft capsules.
  • the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II, and optional one or more additional active agents are formulated into a sold oral dosage form, such as a tablet or capsule, and the solid dosage form is coated with one or more controlled release coatings, such as a delayed release coatings or extended release coatings.
  • the coating or coatings may also contain the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and/or additional active agents.
  • the extended release formulations are generally prepared as diffusion or osmotic systems, which are known in the art.
  • a diffusion system typically consists of two types of devices, a reservoir and a matrix, and is well known and described in the art.
  • the matrix devices are generally prepared by compressing the drug with a slowly dissolving polymer carrier into a tablet form.
  • the three major types of materials used in the preparation of matrix devices are insoluble plastics, hydrophilic polymers, and fatty compounds.
  • Plastic matrices include, but are not limited to, methyl acrylate-methyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, and polyethylene.
  • Hydrophilic polymers include, but are not limited to, cellulosic polymers such as methyl and ethyl cellulose, hydro xyalkylcelluloses such as hydro xypropyl-cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and Carbopol® 934, polyethylene oxides and mixtures thereof.
  • Fatty compounds include, but are not limited to, various waxes such as carnauba wax and glyceryl tristearate and wax-type substances including hydrogenated castor oil or hydrogenated vegetable oil, or mixtures thereof.
  • the plastic material is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl
  • methacrylates cyanoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly( acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamine copolymer poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid)(anhydride), polymethacrylate, polyacrylamide, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers.
  • the acrylic polymer is comprised of one or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers.
  • Ammonio methacrylate copolymers are well known in the art, and are described in NF XVII as fully polymerized copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups.
  • the acrylic polymer is an acrylic resin lacquer such as that which is commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the tradename Eudragit®.
  • the acrylic polymer comprises a mixture of two acrylic resin lacquers commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the tradenames Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit ® RS30D, respectively.
  • Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, the molar ratio of ammonium groups to the remaining neutral (meth)acrylic esters being 1 :20 in Eudragit® RL30D and 1 :40 in Eudragit® RS30D.
  • the mean molecular weight is about 150,000.
  • Edragit® S-100 and Eudragit® L-100 are also preferred.
  • the code designations RL (high permeability) and RS (low permeability) refer to the permeability properties of these agents.
  • Eudragit® RL/RS mixtures are insoluble in water and in digestive fluids. However, multiparticulate systems formed to include the same are swellable and permeable in aqueous solutions and digestive fluids.
  • the polymers described above such as Eudragit® RL/RS may be mixed together in any desired ratio in order to ultimately obtain a sustained-release formulation having a desirable dissolution profile. Desirable sustained-release multiparticulate systems may be obtained, for instance, from 100% Eudragit® RL, 50% Eudragit® RL and 50% Eudragit® RS, and 10% Eudragit® RL and 90% Eudragit® RS.
  • Desirable sustained-release multiparticulate systems may be obtained, for instance, from 100% Eudragit® RL, 50% Eudragit® RL and 50% Eudragit® RS, and 10% Eudragit® RL and 90% Eudragit® RS.
  • acrylic polymers may also be used, such as, for example, Eudragit® L.
  • extended release formulations can be prepared using osmotic systems or by applying a semi-permeable coating to the dosage form.
  • the desired drug release profile can be achieved by combining low permeable and high permeable coating materials in suitable proportion.
  • the devices with different drug release mechanisms described above can be combined in a final dosage form comprising single or multiple units.
  • multiple units include, but are not limited to, multilayer tablets and capsules containing tablets, beads, or granules.
  • An immediate release portion can be added to the extended release system by means of either applying an immediate release layer on top of the extended release core using a coating or compression process or in a multiple unit system such as a capsule containing extended and immediate release beads.
  • Extended release tablets containing hydrophilic polymers are prepared by techniques commonly known in the art such as direct compression, wet granulation, or dry granulation. Their formulations usually incorporate polymers, diluents, binders, and lubricants as well as the active pharmaceutical ingredient.
  • the usual diluents include inert powdered substances such as starches, powdered cellulose, especially crystalline and microcrystalline cellulose, sugars such as fructose, mannitol and sucrose, grain flours and similar edible powders.
  • Typical diluents include, for example, various types of starch, lactose, mannitol, kaolin, calcium phosphate or sulfate, inorganic salts such as sodium chloride and powdered sugar. Powdered cellulose derivatives are also useful.
  • Typical tablet binders include substances such as starch, gelatin and sugars such as lactose, fructose, and glucose. Natural and synthetic gums, including acacia, alginates, methylcellulose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone can also be used. Polyethylene glycol, hydrophilic polymers, ethylcellulose and waxes can also serve as binders.
  • a lubricant is necessary in a tablet formulation to prevent the tablet and punches from sticking in the die. The lubricant is chosen from such slippery solids as talc, magnesium and calcium stearate, stearic acid and hydrogenated vegetable oils.
  • Extended release tablets containing wax materials are generally prepared using methods known in the art such as a direct blend method, a congealing method, and an aqueous dispersion method.
  • the congealing method the drug is mixed with a wax material and either spray- congealed or congealed and screened and processed.
  • Delayed release formulations can be created by coating a solid dosage form with a polymer film, which is insoluble in the acidic environment of the stomach, and soluble in the neutral environment of the small intestine.
  • the delayed release dosage units can be prepared, for example, by coating a drug or a drug-containing composition with a selected coating material.
  • the drug-containing composition may be, e.g., a tablet for incorporation into a capsule, a tablet for use as an inner core in a "coated core" dosage form, or a plurality of drug-containing beads, particles or granules, for incorporation into either a tablet or capsule.
  • Preferred coating materials include bioerodible, gradually hydro lyzable, gradually water-soluble, and/or enzymatically degradable polymers, and may be conventional "enteric" polymers. Enteric polymers, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, become soluble in the higher pH environment of the lower gastrointestinal tract or slowly erode as the dosage form passes through the
  • Suitable coating materials for effecting delayed release include, but are not limited to, cellulosic polymers such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydro xyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydro xypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose phthalate, methylcellulose, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate and carboxymethylcellulose sodium; acrylic acid polymers and copolymers, formed from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate and/or ethyl methacrylate, and other methacrylic resins that are commercially available under the tradename Eudragit®. (Rohm Pharma;
  • Eudragit® L30D-55 and LI 00-55 soluble at pH 5.5 and above
  • Eudragit® L-100 soluble at pH 6.0 and above
  • Eudragit® S soluble at pH 7.0 and above, as a result of a higher degree of esterification
  • Eudragits® NE, RL and RS water-insoluble polymers having different degrees of permeability and expandability
  • vinyl polymers and copolymers such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl acetate, vinylacetate phthalate, vinylacetate crotonic acid copolymer, and ethylene -vinyl acetate copolymer
  • enzymatically degradable polymers such as azo polymers, pectin, chitosan, amylose and guar gum
  • zein and shellac zein and shellac.
  • the preferred coating weights for particular coating materials may be readily determined by those skilled in the art by evaluating individual release profiles for tablets, beads and granules prepared with different quantities of various coating materials. It is the combination of materials, method and form of application that produce the desired release characteristics, which one can determine only from the clinical studies.
  • the coating composition may include conventional additives, such as plasticizers, pigments, colorants, stabilizing agents, glidants, etc.
  • a plasticizer is normally present to reduce the fragility of the coating, and will generally represent about 10 wt. % to 50 wt. % relative to the dry weight of the polymer.
  • typical plasticizers include polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, triacetin, dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, dibutyl sebacate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, triethyl acetyl citrate, castor oil and acetylated monoglycerides.
  • a stabilizing agent is used to stabilize particles in the dispersion.
  • Typical stabilizing agents are nonionic emulsifiers such as sorbitan esters, polysorbates and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Glidants are recommended to reduce sticking effects during film formation and drying, and will generally represent approximately 25 wt. % to 100 wt. % of the polymer weight in the coating solution.
  • One effective glidant is talc.
  • Other glidants such as magnesium stearate and glycerol monostearates may also be used.
  • Pigments such as titanium dioxide may also be used.
  • Small quantities of an anti-foaming agent such as a silicone (e.g., simethicone), may also be added to the coating composition.
  • Suitable dosage forms for topical administration include creams, ointments, salves, sprays, gels, lotions, emulsions, and transdermal patches.
  • the formulation may be formulated for transmucosal, transepithelial, transendothelial, or transdermal administration.
  • the compounds can also be formulated for intranasal delivery, pulmonary delivery, or inhalation.
  • the compositions may further contain one or more chemical penetration enhancers, membrane permeability agents, membrane transport agents, emollients, surfactants, stabilizers, and combination thereof.
  • Emollients are an externally applied agent that softens or soothes skin and are generally known in the art and listed in compendia, such as the "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients", 4 th Ed., Pharmaceutical Press, 2003.
  • emollients include, without limitation, almond oil, castor oil, ceratonia extract, cetostearoyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cetyl esters wax, cholesterol, cottonseed oil, cyclomethicone, ethylene glycol palmitostearate, glycerin, glycerin monostearate, glyceryl monooleate, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, lanolin, lecithin, light mineral oil, medium-chain triglycerides, mineral oil and lanolin alcohols, petrolatum, petrolatum and lanolin alcohols, soybean oil, starch, stearyl alcohol, sunflower oil, xylitol and combinations thereof.
  • the emollients are examples of the emollients.
  • surfactants are surface-active agents that lower surface tension and thereby increase the emulsifying, foaming, dispersing, spreading and wetting properties of a product.
  • Suitable non-ionic surfactants include emulsifying wax, glyceryl monooleate, polyoxy ethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, polysorbate, sorbitan esters, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, cyclodextrins, glycerin monostearate, poloxamer, povidone and combinations thereof.
  • the non-ionic surfactant is stearyl alcohol.
  • Emmulsifiers are surface active substances which promote the suspension of one liquid in another and promote the formation of a stable mixture, or emulsion, of oil and water. Common emulsifiers are: metallic soaps, certain animal and vegetable oils, and various polar compounds.
  • Suitable emulsifiers include acacia, anionic emulsifying wax, calcium stearate, carbomers, cetostearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cholesterol, diethanolamine, ethylene glycol palmitostearate, glycerin monostearate, glyceryl monooleate, hydroxpropyl cellulose, hypromellose, lanolin, hydrous, lanolin alcohols, lecithin, medium-chain triglycerides, methylcellulose, mineral oil and lanolin alcohols, monobasic sodium phosphate,
  • the emulsifier is glycerol stearate.
  • Suitable classes of penetration enhancers include, but are not limited to, fatty alcohols, fatty acid esters, fatty acids, fatty alcohol ethers, amino acids, phospholipids, lecithins, cholate salts, enzymes, amines and amides, complexing agents (liposomes, cyclodextrins, modified celluloses, and diimides), macrocyclics, such as macrocylic lactones, ketones, and anhydrides and cyclic ureas, surfactants, N-methyl pyrrolidones and derivatives thereof, DMSO and related compounds, ionic compounds, azone and related compounds, and solvents, such as alcohols, ketones, amides, polyols (e.g., glycols). Examples of these classes are known in the art.
  • Hydrophilic refers to substances that have strongly polar groups that readily interact with water.
  • Lipophilic refers to compounds having an affinity for lipids.
  • Amphiphilic refers to a molecule combining hydrophilic and lipophilic
  • Hydrophilic refers to substances that lack an affinity for water; tending to repel and not absorb water as well as not dissolve in or mix with water.
  • a "gel” is a colloid in which the dispersed phase has combined with the continuous phase to produce a semisolid material, such as jelly.
  • An "oil” is a composition containing at least 95% wt of a lipophilic substance.
  • lipophilic substances include but are not limited to naturally occurring and synthetic oils, fats, fatty acids, lecithins, triglycerides and combinations thereof.
  • a “continuous phase” refers to the liquid in which solids are suspended or droplets of another liquid are dispersed, and is sometimes called the external phase. This also refers to the fluid phase of a colloid within which solid or fluid particles are distributed. If the continuous phase is water (or another hydrophilic solvent), water-soluble or hydrophilic drugs will dissolve in the continuous phase (as opposed to being dispersed). In a multiphase formulation (e.g., an emulsion), the discreet phase is suspended or dispersed in the continuous phase.
  • An “emulsion” is a composition containing a mixture of non-miscible
  • the non-miscible components include a lipophilic component and an aqueous component.
  • An emulsion is a preparation of one liquid distributed in small globules throughout the body of a second liquid.
  • the dispersed liquid is the discontinuous phase, and the dispersion medium is the continuous phase.
  • oil is the dispersed liquid and an aqueous solution is the continuous phase, it is known as an oil-in-water emulsion
  • water or aqueous solution is the dispersed phase and oil or oleaginous substance is the continuous phase
  • water-in-oil emulsion water-in-oil emulsion.
  • Either or both of the oil phase and the aqueous phase may contain one or more surfactants, emulsifiers, emulsion stabilizers, buffers, and other excipients.
  • Preferred excipients include surfactants, especially non-ionic surfactants; emulsifying agents, especially emulsifying waxes; and liquid non-volatile non-aqueous materials, particularly glycols such as propylene glycol.
  • the oil phase may contain other oily pharmaceutically approved excipients. For example, materials such as hydroxylated castor oil or sesame oil may be used in the oil phase as surfactants or emulsifiers.
  • An emulsion is a preparation of one liquid distributed in small globules throughout the body of a second liquid.
  • the dispersed liquid is the discontinuous phase, and the dispersion medium is the continuous phase.
  • oil is the dispersed liquid and an aqueous solution is the continuous phase, it is known as an oil-in-water emulsion
  • water or aqueous solution is the dispersed phase and oil or oleaginous substance is the continuous phase
  • the oil phase may consist at least in part of a propellant, such as an HFA propellant.
  • Either or both of the oil phase and the aqueous phase may contain one or more surfactants, emulsifiers, emulsion stabilizers, buffers, and other excipients.
  • Preferred excipients include surfactants, especially non-ionic surfactants; emulsifying agents, especially emulsifying waxes; and liquid non-volatile nonaqueous materials, particularly glycols such as propylene glycol.
  • the oil phase may contain other oily pharmaceutically approved excipients. For example, materials such as
  • hydroxylated castor oil or sesame oil may be used in the oil phase as surfactants or emulsifiers.
  • a sub-set of emulsions are the self-emulsifying systems.
  • These drug delivery systems are typically capsules (hard shell or soft shell) comprised of the drug dispersed or dissolved in a mixture of surfactant(s) and lipophilic liquids such as oils or other water immiscible liquids.
  • capsules hard shell or soft shell
  • surfactant(s) and lipophilic liquids such as oils or other water immiscible liquids.
  • a “lotion” is a low- to medium-viscosity liquid formulation.
  • a lotion can contain finely powdered substances that are in soluble in the dispersion medium through the use of suspending agents and dispersing agents.
  • lotions can have as the dispersed phase liquid substances that are immiscible wit the vehicle and are usually dispersed by means of emulsifying agents or other suitable stabilizers.
  • the lotion is in the form of an emulsion having a viscosity of between 100 and 1000 centistokes. The fluidity of lotions permits rapid and uniform application over a wide surface area. Lotions are typically intended to dry on the skin leaving a thin coat of their medicinal components on the skin's surface.
  • a "cream” is a viscous liquid or semi-solid emulsion of either the "oil-in-water” or “water-in-oil type”. Creams may contain emulsifying agents and/or other stabilizing agents. In one embodiment, the formulation is in the form of a cream having a viscosity of greater than 1000 centistokes, typically in the range of 20,000-50,000 centistokes. Creams are often time preferred over ointments as they are generally easier to spread and easier to remove.
  • Creams are typically thicker than lotions, may have various uses and often one uses more varied oils/butters, depending upon the desired effect upon the skin.
  • the water-base percentage is about 60-75 % and the oil-base is about 20-30 % of the total, with the other percentages being the emulsifier agent, preservatives and additives for a total of 100 %.
  • An "ointment” is a semisolid preparation containing an ointment base and optionally one or more active agents.
  • suitable ointment bases include hydrocarbon bases (e.g., petrolatum, white petrolatum, yellow ointment, and mineral oil); absorption bases (hydrophilic petrolatum, anhydrous lanolin, lanolin, and cold cream); water- removable bases (e.g., hydrophilic ointment), and water-soluble bases (e.g., polyethylene glycol ointments).
  • Pastes typically differ from ointments in that they contain a larger percentage of solids. Pastes are typically more absorptive and less greasy that ointments prepared with the same components.
  • a "gel” is a semisolid system containing dispersions of small or large molecules in a liquid vehicle that is rendered semisolid by the action of a thickening agent or polymeric material dissolved or suspended in the liquid vehicle.
  • the liquid may include a lipophilic component, an aqueous component or both.
  • Some emulsions may be gels or otherwise include a gel component.
  • Some gels, however, are not emulsions because they do not contain a homogenized blend of immiscible components.
  • Suitable gelling agents include, but are not limited to, modified celluloses, such as hydro xypropyl cellulose and hydroxyethyl cellulose; Carbopol homopolymers and copolymers; and combinations thereof.
  • Suitable solvents in the liquid vehicle include, but are not limited to, diglycol monoethyl ether; alklene glycols, such as propylene glycol; dimethyl isosorbide; alcohols, such as isopropyl alcohol and ethanol.
  • the solvents are typically selected for their ability to dissolve the drug.
  • Other additives, which improve the skin feel and/or emolliency of the formulation, may also be incorporated. Examples of such additives include, but are not limited, isopropyl myristate, ethyl acetate, C12-C15 alkyl benzoates, mineral oil, squalane, cyclomethicone, capric/caprylic triglycerides, and combinations thereof.
  • Foams consist of an emulsion in combination with a gaseous propellant.
  • the gaseous propellant consists primarily of hydro fluoroalkanes (HFAs).
  • HFAs hydro fluoroalkanes
  • Suitable propellants include HFAs such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134a) and 1,1,1,2,3,3,3- heptafluoropropane (HFA 227), but mixtures and admixtures of these and other HFAs that are currently approved or may become approved for medical use are suitable.
  • the propellants are not hydrocarbon propellant gases which can produce flammable or explosive vapors during spraying.
  • the compositions contain no volatile alcohols, which can produce flammable or explosive vapors during use.
  • Buffers are used to control pH of a composition.
  • the buffers buffer the composition from a pH of about 4 to a pH of about 7.5, or from a pH of about 4 to a pH of about 7, or from a pH of about 5 to a pH of about 7.
  • the buffer is triethanolamine.
  • Preservatives can be used to prevent the growth of fungi and microorganisms.
  • Suitable antifungal and antimicrobial agents include, but are not limited to, benzoic acid, butylparaben, ethyl paraben, methyl paraben, propylparaben, sodium benzoate, sodium propionate, benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, benzyl alcohol, cetylpyridinium chloride, chlorobutanol, phenol, phenylethyl alcohol, and thimerosal.
  • repeated application can be done or a patch can be used to provide continuous administration of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II over an extended period of time.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II are formulated for pulmonary delivery, such as intranasal administration or oral inhalation.
  • the respiratory tract is the structure involved in the exchange of gases between the atmosphere and the blood stream.
  • the lungs are branching structures ultimately ending with the alveoli where the exchange of gases occurs.
  • the alveolar surface area is the largest in the respiratory system and is where drug absorbtion occurs.
  • the alveoli are covered by a thin epithelium without cilia or a mucus blanket and secrete surfactant phospholipids.
  • the respiratory tract encompasses the upper airways, including the oropharynx and larynx, followed by the lower airways, which include the trachea followed by
  • the bronchi and bronchioli are bifurcations into the bronchi and bronchioli.
  • the upper and lower airways are called the conducting airways.
  • the terminal bronchioli then divide into respiratory bronchioli which then lead to the ultimate respiratory zone, the alveoli, or deep lung.
  • the deep lung, or alveoli are the primary target of inhaled therapeutic aerosols for systemic drug delivery.
  • aerosol refers to any preparation of a fine mist of particles, which can be in solution or a suspension, whether or not it is produced using a propellant. Aerosols can be produced using standard techniques, such as ultrasonication or high pressure treatment.
  • Carriers for pulmonary formulations can be divided into those for dry powder formulations and for administration as solutions. Aerosols for the delivery of therapeutic agents to the respiratory tract are known in the art. For administration via the upper respiratory tract, the formulation can be formulated into a solution, e.g., water or isotonic saline, buffered or unbuffered, or as a suspension, for intranasal administration as drops or as a spray. Such solutions or suspensions are isotonic relative to nasal secretions and of about the same pH, ranging e.g., from about pH 4.0 to about pH 7.4 or, from pH 6.0 to pH 7.0. Buffers should be physiologically compatible and include, simply by way of example, phosphate buffers.
  • a representative nasal decongestant is described as being buffered to a pH of about 6.2.
  • a suitable saline content and pH for an innocuous aqueous solution for nasal and/or upper respiratory administration is described.
  • the aqueous solutions is water, physiologically acceptable aqueous solutions containing salts and/or buffers, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS), or any other aqueous solution acceptable for administration to a animal or human.
  • PBS phosphate buffered saline
  • Such solutions are well known to a person skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, distilled water, de- ionized water, pure or ultrapure water, saline, phosphate-buffered saline (PBS).
  • Other suitable aqueous vehicles include, but are not limited to, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride.
  • Aqueous suspensions may include suspending agents such as cellulose derivatives, sodium alginate, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone and gum tragacanth, and a wetting agent such as lecithin.
  • suspending agents such as cellulose derivatives, sodium alginate, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone and gum tragacanth
  • a wetting agent such as lecithin.
  • Suitable preservatives for aqueous suspensions include ethyl and n-propyl p- hy dro xyb enzo at e .
  • solvents that are low toxicity organic (i.e. nonaqueous) class 3 residual solvents such as ethanol, acetone, ethyl acetate, tetrahydofuran, ethyl ether, and propanol may be used for the formulations.
  • the solvent is selected based on its ability to readily aerosolize the formulation.
  • the solvent should not detrimentally react with the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II.
  • An appropriate solvent should be used that dissolves the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II or forms a suspension of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II.
  • the solvent should be sufficiently volatile to enable formation of an aerosol of the solution or suspension.
  • Additional solvents or aerosolizing agents such as freons, can be added as desired to increase the volatility of the solution or suspension.
  • compositions may contain minor amounts of polymers, surfactants, or other excipients well known to those of the art.
  • minor amounts means no excipients are present that might affect or mediate uptake of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II in the lungs and that the excipients that are present are present in amount that do not adversely affect uptake of pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II in the lungs.
  • Dry lipid powders can be directly dispersed in ethanol because of their hydrophobic character.
  • organic solvents such as chloroform
  • the desired quantity of solution is placed in a vial, and the chloroform is evaporated under a stream of nitrogen to form a dry thin film on the surface of a glass vial.
  • the film swells easily when reconstituted with ethanol.
  • the suspension is sonicated.
  • Nonaqueous suspensions of lipids can also be prepared in absolute ethanol using a reusable PARI LC Jet+ nebulizer (PARI Respiratory Equipment, Monterey, CA).
  • Dry powder formulations with large particle size have improved flowability characteristics, such as less aggregation, easier aerosolization, and potentially less phagocytosis.
  • Dry powder aerosols for inhalation therapy are generally produced with mean diameters primarily in the range of less than 5 microns, although a preferred range is between one and ten microns in aerodynamic diameter.
  • Large "carrier" particles (containing no drug) have been co-delivered with therapeutic aerosols to aid in achieving efficient aerosolization among other possible benefits.
  • Polymeric particles may be prepared using single and double emulsion solvent evaporation, spray drying, solvent extraction, solvent evaporation, phase separation, simple and complex coacervation, interfacial polymerization, and other methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art.
  • Particles may be made using methods for making microspheres or microcapsules known in the art.
  • the preferred methods of manufacture are by spray drying and freeze drying, which entails using a solution containing the surfactant, spraying to form droplets of the desired size, and removing the solvent.
  • the particles may be fabricated with the appropriate material, surface roughness, diameter and tap density for localized delivery to selected regions of the respiratory tract such as the deep lung or upper airways. For example, higher density or larger particles may be used for upper airway delivery. Similarly, a mixture of different sized particles, provided with the same or different EGS may be administered to target different regions of the lung in one administration.
  • Formulations for pulmonary delivery include unilamellar phospholipid vesicles, liposomes, or lipoprotein particles. Formulations and methods of making such formulations containing nucleic acid are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Liposomes are formed from commercially available phospholipids supplied by a variety of vendors including Avanti Polar Lipids, Inc. (Birmingham, Ala.). In one embodiment, the liposome can include a ligand molecule specific for a receptor on the surface of the target cell to direct the liposome to the target cell. D. Examples
  • Zaprinast was obtained from BioMol International Inc (Plymouth Meeting, PA). Epic® 384 biosensor microplates cell culture compatible were obtained from Corning Inc. (Corning, NY). Compounds with a purity greater than 95% were purchased from various vendors or custom synthesized. CID2745687 (SPB05142) was obtained from Ryan Scientific, Inc. (Mt. Pleasant, SC).
  • HT-29 cells were obtained from American Type Cell Culture (Manassas, VA).
  • the cell culture medium was McCoy's 5a Medium Modified supplemented with 10% FBS, 4.5g/liter glucose, 2 mM glutamine, and antibiotics.
  • TangoTM GPR35-bla U20S cells were purchased from Invitrogen. The cells were cultured according to the protocols recommended by the supplier. Briefly, the cells were passed using McCoy's 5A medium (Invitrogen 16600-082) supplemented with 10%> dialyzed fetal bovine serum, 0.1 ⁇ NEAA, 25 ⁇ Hepes (pH 7.3), ImM sodium pyruvate, 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g/ml streptomycin, 200 ⁇ g/ml zeocin, 50 ⁇ g/ml hygromycin, and 100 ⁇ g/ml geneticin in a humidified 37°C/5% C0 2 incubator.
  • McCoy's 5A medium Invitrogen 16600-082
  • fetal bovine serum 0.1 NEAA
  • 25 ⁇ Hepes 25 ⁇ Hepes (pH 7.3)
  • ImM sodium pyruvate 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 ⁇ g/ml
  • HT29 cells (10 7 cells per sample) were harvested and lysed in 1%> NP40 lysis buffer (150 mM NaCl, 25 mM Tris, 1% NP 40, pH 7.5) with protease inhibitors cocktail (Roche). Proteins were separated on 15% SDS gel. Membrane was blotted with rabbit anti- GPR35 (1 : 1000) (Abeam, Ab76217) at 4°C overnight, then with 2nd HRP conjugated Goat anti-rabbit or Horse anti-goat antibody (1 :2000 dilution) for 30 minutes. Western blots were developed using the ECL plus kit (GE Healthcare) on a Fujifilm Luminescent Image
  • HT29 cells were plated on a 8-well chamber slide (10,000 cells/well) and incubated at 37°C for 24 firs. Next day, cells were fixed with 4% formaldehyde in 1 x PBS for 15 min, followed by blocking and permeabilization in a buffer that contains 4% goat serum, 0.1 % BSA, 0.1% Triton XI 00 in 1 x PBS for 2 hrs.
  • Epic® beta version wavelength interrogation system (Corning Inc., Corning, NY) was used for whole cell sensing. This system consists of a temperature-control unit, an optical detection unit, and an on-board liquid handling unit with robotics. The detection unit is centered on integrated fiber optics, and enables kinetic measures of cellular responses with a time interval of ⁇ 15sec. Also Epic® commercial systems were used, wherein a liquid handler accessory was attached to Epic® reader system.
  • the RWG biosensor is capable of detecting minute changes in local index of refraction near the sensor surface. Since the local index of refraction within a cell is a function of density and its distribution of biomass (e.g., proteins, molecular complexes), the biosensor exploits its evanescent wave to non-invasively detect ligand-induced dynamic mass redistribution in native cells.
  • the evanescent wave extends into the cells and exponentially decays over distance, leading to a characteristic sensing volume of -150 nm, implying that any optical response mediated through the receptor activation only represents an average over the portion of the cell that the evanescent wave is sampling.
  • the aggregation of many cellular events downstream the receptor activation determines the kinetics and amplitudes of a ligand-induced DMR.
  • cells were typically grown using ⁇ 1 to 2 x 10 4 cells per well at passage 3 to 15 suspended in 50 ⁇ of the corresponding culture medium in the biosensor microplate, and were cultured at 37 °C under air/5% C0 2 for ⁇ 1 day. The confluency for all cells at the time of assays was -95% to 100%.
  • the molecule solutions were made by diluting the stored concentrated solutions with the HBSS (lx Hanks balanced salt solution, plus 20mM Hepes, pH 7.1), and transferred into a 384well polypropylene molecule storage plate to prepare a molecule source plate. Both molecule and marker source plates were made separately when a two-step assay was performed.
  • HBSS lx Hanks balanced salt solution, plus 20mM Hepes, pH 7.1
  • the cells were washed twice with the HBSS and maintained in 30 ⁇ 1 of the HBSS to prepare a cell assay plate. Both the cell assay plate and the molecule and marker source plate(s) were then incubated in the hotel of the reader system. After ⁇ lhr of incubation the baseline
  • TangoTM GPR35-£/a U20S cells was used.
  • This cell line stably expresses two fusion proteins: human GPR35 linked to a TEV protease site and a Gal4-VP16 transcription factor, and ⁇ -arrestin/TEV protease fusion protein.
  • the cell line also stably expresses the ⁇ - lactamase reporter gene under the control of a UAS response element.
  • the activation of GPR35 by agonists leads to the recruitment of ⁇ -arrestin/TEV protease fusion proteins to the activated GPR35.
  • the protease cleaves the Gal4-VP16 transcription factor from the receptor, which then translocates to the nucleus and activates the expression of beta- lactamase. Briefly, 10000 cells per well were seeded in 384-well, black- wall, clear bottom assay plates with low fluorescence background (Corning), and cultured in DMEM
  • HT29 expresses relatively high level of GPR35, at least at mRNA level (Fang, Y. et al, US Patent Application 61/365,861 , which is hereby incorporated by reference by its entirety). It was also showed using western blotting that HT29 lysates contain GPR35 iso forms, whose molecular weight is close to the expected values for both GPR35a and GPR35b, respectively. Confocal imaging further showed that GPR35 is primarily located at the cell surface plasma membrane (Fig.4A). HT29 is a human colon adenocarcinoma grade II cell line.
  • DMR assays showed that bumetanide resulted in a dose dependent DMR signal in HT29 cells, leading to an EC50 of 1.8+0.5 ⁇ . Bumetanide also caused a dose-dependent desensitization of HT29 cells upon stimulation with the known GPR35 agonist zaprinast ( ⁇ ), leading to an IC50 of 3.3+0.3 ⁇ . Taken together, these results indicate that bumetanide is a GPR35 agonist.
  • the known antagonist CID2745687 (methyl-5-[(tert- butylcarbamothioylhydrazinylidene)methyl]-l-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-pyrazole-4- carboxylate) also dose-dependently blocked the DMR signals arising from these agonists, each at its respective EC80 concentration, as exampled in Fig.5. These results further confirmed that these ligands are reversible and competitive GPR35 agonists.
  • Receptor internalization is another hallmark of GPCR activation and signaling.
  • agonism activity of GPR35 agonists identified, confocal imaging was used to visualize the location of GPR35 upon receptor activation by GPR35 agonists. Results showed that the fluorescence from stained GPR35 primary appears at the cell plasma surface, when the cells were treated with 0.25% DMSO only, suggesting that indeed GPR35 is a cell plasma membrane bound receptor.
  • GPR35 agonists tested luciferin, L-DOPA, nitro-L-tyrosine and compound 2
  • luciferin, L-DOPA, nitro-L-tyrosine and compound 2 resulted in internalization of GPR35 from plasma membrane to intracellular organelles (e.g., endosomes) (Fig.3), further indicating that these compounds are indeed GPR35 agonists.
  • ligands were found to be active in the beta-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays: laccaic acid, baicalein, catechin, gallic acid, hematin, gentisic acid, benserazide, myricetin, morin, alpha-cyano-4-hydroxycinnamic acid, wedelolactone, lapachol, ellagic acid, caffeic acid, compounds 1, 3, 6, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,19, 20, and 22.
  • G protein-coupled receptor 35a G protein-coupled receptor 35a
  • mRNA NCBI Reference Sequence: NM 005301.2
  • SEQ ID NO:2 The Homo sapiens G protein-coupled receptor 35a (GPR35a), mRNA (NCBI Reference Sequence: NM 005301.2) (SEQ ID NO:2) is
  • GPR35b The protein sequence of GPR35b (SEQ ID NO:4) (S. Okumura, H. Baba, T. Kumada, K. Nanmoku, H. Nakajima, Y. Nakane, K. Hioki, K. Ikenaka (2004) Cloning of a G-protein-cou led receptor that shows an activity to transform NIH3T3 cells and is expressed in gastric cancer cells, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135) is
  • GPR35 is a novel lysophosphatidic acid receptor. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 395: 232-237 S. Okumura, H. Baba, T. Kumada, K. Nanmoku, H. Nakajima, Y. Nakane, K. Hioki, K. Ikenaka (2004) Cloning of a G-protein-coupled receptor that shows an activity to transform NIH3T3 cells and is expressed in gastric cancer cells, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135
  • GPR35 is a functional receptor in rat dorsal root ganglion neurons, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 365: 344- 348.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Nitrogen Condensed Heterocyclic Rings (AREA)

Abstract

Disclosed are compositions and methods for reducing the risk of and/or treatment of diseases which are pathophysiologically related to GPR35, and/or GPR35-hERG signaling complex. For example, disclosed are compounds for reducing the risk of and/or treating diseases which are pathophysiologically related to GPR35 in a subject.

Description

GPR35 LIGANDS AND THE USES THEREOF
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application claims the benefit of priority under 35 U.S.C. § 119 of U.S. Provisional Application Serial No. 61/515,409 filed on August 5, 2011 the content of which is relied upon and incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
SEQUENCE LISTING
[0002] This application contains a Sequence Listing electronically submitted via EFS- Web to the United States Patent and Trademark Office as text filed named
"20110726 SP1 l_170P_ST25.txt" having a size of 11,285 bytes and created on 07/26/2011. Due to the electronic filing of the Sequence Listing, the electronically submitted Sequence Listing serves as both the paper copy required by 37 CFR § 1.821(c) and the CRF required by § 1.821(e). The information contained in the Sequence Listing is hereby incorporated herein by reference and does not go beyond the disclosure in the International Application as filed.
BACKGROUND
[0003] G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) have been and continue to be one of the richest families of drug targets. There are at least two key drivers for this. The first driver is the increasing numbers of orphan receptors being deorphanized, some of which have implications for human diseases. Examples are GPR3 for Alzheimer's disease and GPR40 for diabetes. The second driver is associated with the recent realization that GPCRs are competent to elicit a rich array of cell signaling pathways (i.e., pleiotropic signaling), and ligands may give operational biases to activate the receptor. These pathway biased ligands may open new revenues for drug discovery.
[0004] GPR35 is a rhodopsin-like GPCR first identified in 1998 (O'Dowd, et al, Genomics 47: 310-313 (1998)). The human GPR35 gene encodes a protein of 309 amino acids. GPR35 is expressed in various mammalian tissues, such as the gastrointestinal tissues, lymphoid tissues and the central and peripheral nervous tissues. Several investigators have reported GPR35 to be involved in the development of gastric cancer (Okumura, et al, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135 (2004)), the regulation of neuronal excitability and synaptic release (Guo, et al, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 324: 342-351 (2008)], nociception (Ohshiro, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 365: 344-348 (2008), the pathogenesis of brachydactyly-mental retardation syndrome (Shrimpton, et al, Clin. Genet. 66: 537-544 (2004)), the regulation of blood pressure (Min, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 393: 55-60 (2010)], coronary artery disease, asthma, or early-onset inflammatory bowel.
[0005] Identification of ligands, particularly the endogenous ligands, that activate GPR35 are desired. To date, there are several agonists for GPR35 reported so far, including kynurenic acid, NPPB, zaprinast, pamoic acid and lysophosphatidic acid (LPA). Both kynurenic acid and LPA are indicated to be an endogenous ligand for GPR35 (Wang, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 281 : 22021-22028 (2006); Oka, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 395: 232- 237 (2010)). Both kynurenic acid and LPA elicited several cellular responses in HEK293 cells and/or CHO cells expressing GPR35. For example, in HEK-293 cells expressing GPR35, 2-acyl LPA markedly enhanced the Ca2+ response, the activation of RhoA and the phosphorylation of ERK in GPR35 -expressing cells. 2-Acyl LPA also induced the
internalization of the receptor molecules. Nevertheless, it remains unclear whether kynurenic acid or LPA is the natural agonist for GPR35. Recently using a GPR35-P-arrestin-2 interaction assay Jenkins et al, discovered a number of compounds possessing agonist activity on GPR35. These agonists include cromolyn disodium, dicumarol, pamoate, niflumic acid, and luteolin. These compounds active at human GPR35 in the P-arrestin-2 interaction assay were also able to promote cell growth via Gal3 (Jenkins, et al, Biochemical Journal 432, 451-459 (2010)).
[0006] There is a strong need for new drug therapies for the treatment of subjects suffering from or susceptible to pathological conditions or diseases associated with GPR35.
SUMMARY
[0007] Disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions containing a compound of Formula I or II:
Figure imgf000004_0001
Formula I or Formula II or pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof.
[0008] In some embodiments R1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when R1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0009] In some embodiments R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N02, -SO2NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[00010] In some embodiments R8 can be -H, -OH, -N02, -S02(NH3), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
[0010] In some embodiments R7, R9, R10, R11 and R12 can each individually be -H, -OH, -NO2, -SO2NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0011] Disclosed are methods for reducing the risk of and/or treating diseases which are pathophysio logically related to GPR35. For example, disclosed are methods of administering to a subject a class of compounds, including the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, clathrates, or prodrugs thereof, defined by Formula I or II. Disclosed are compounds of structural Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof. These compounds are useful as therapeutic agents for modulating GPR35, and for therapeutic prevention or treatment of diseases to which GPR35 activity is
pathophysio logically related.
[0012] The compounds disclosed herein can be GPR35 modulators. The compounds are useful as therapeutic agents for modulating GPR35, and for treatment or reducing the risk of diseases that are related to the activity of GPR35.
[0013] Additional features and advantages will be set forth in the detailed description which follows, and in part will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art from that description or recognized by practicing the embodiments as described herein, including the detailed description which follows, the claims, as well as the appended drawings.
[0014] It is to be understood that both the foregoing general description and the following detailed description are merely exemplary, and are intended to provide an overview or framework to understanding the nature and character of the claims. The accompanying drawings are included to provide a further understanding, and are incorporated in and constitute a part of this specification. The drawings illustrate one or more embodiment(s), and together with the description serve to explain principles and operation of the various embodiments.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0015] Figures 1A-1D show that Bumetanide acts as a GPR35 agonist. Figure 1A shows the dynamic mass redistribution (DMR) of HT29 cells in response to stimulation with bumetanide at different doses; Figure IB shows the DMR amplitude as the function of bumetanide concentrations; Figure 1C shows the dose-dependent desensitization by bumetanide in DMR signal of HT29 in response to the known GPR35 agonist zaprinast. The cells were prestimulated with bumetanide at different doses (as indicated in the figures) for lhr, followed by stimulation with zaprinast at a fixed dose (1 micromolar). The zaprinast DMR was shown. Figure ID shows the zaprinast DMR amplitude as a function of bumetanide.
[0016] Figures 2A-2L show DMR signals of HT29 upon stimulation with compound solutions. Each graph represents an averaged response of 2 to 4 replicates. Figure 2A shows the DMR responding buffer vehicle (HBSS) which is used as a negative control. Figure 2B to 2L shows the DMR signals induced by various GPR35 agonists at a concentration close to its EC80. Figure 2B shows the DMR of L-DOPA at ImM; Figure 2C shows the DMR of DL- DOPA at ImM; Figure 2D shows the DMR of 3-nitro-L-tyrosine at 0.5mM; Figure 2E shows the DMR of DOPAC at ImM; Figure 2F shows the DMR of HIBA at 250μΜ; Figure 2G shows the DMR of 3,3',5'-Triiodo-L-thyronine(T3) at 128μΜ; Figure 2H shows the DMR of 3-Iodo-L-tyrosine at ImM; Figure 21 shows the DMR of DL-3,4-Dihydroxymandelate at ImM; Figure 2J shows the DMR of Gentisate at 250μΜ; Figure 2K shows the DMR of compound 1 at 32μΜ, and Figure 2L shows the DMR of compound 2 at 32μΜ.
[0017] Figure 3 shows the stimulation of HT29 cells with identified GPR35 agonists which led to phosphorylation of ERK1/2, as measured using Western Blotting. HT29 cells were seeded in 6-well microplate at a density of 3x10A6 cells/well. After overnight culture, HT29 cells were treated with various GPR35 ligands for 30min. After harvesting using 100 μΕ of RIPA lysis buffer (with protease inhibitor cocktail), cytosolic proteins were extracted and protein concentration was determined. Loading amount of proteins per sample was 200 μg of the total cytosolic protein. After electrophoresis, the total ERK and phosphorylated ER l/2 were blotted using respective antibodies. Actin was also blotted and used as a control.
[0018] Figures 4A-4F show that GPR35 agonists caused internalization of GPR35 receptors in HT29 cells. The cells were stimulated with compounds for 30min at 37° C and stained with anti-GPR35 antibody. Figure 4A shows DMSO as a negative control; Figure 4B shows the known GPR35 agonist pamoic acid at 10 μΜ; Figure 4C shows Compound 2 at 12.5μΜ; Figure 4D shows Luciferin at ImM; Figure 4E shows L-DOPA at 2mM; and Figure 4F shows Nitro-L-tyrosine at 50μΜ.
[0019] Figures 5A-5D show that GPR35 agonist-induced DMR signals can be blocked by a known GPR35 antagonist CID2745687. Figure 5A shows that the antagonist did not lead to any detectable DMR in HT29, but it at 32 micromolar almost completely blocked the DMR induced by 500nM zaprinast. Figure 5B shows that the antagonist dose-dependently blocked the DMR induced by zaprinast at 500nM. Figure 5C shows that the antagonist dose- dependently blocked the DMR induced by compound 2 at 64 micromolar. Figure 5D shows that the antagonist dose-dependently blocked the DMR induced by lapachol at 8 micromolar.
[0020] Figures 6A-6C show that GPR35 agonists can result in GPR35 dependent beta- arrestin translocation, as assayed using Tango beta-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays. DETAILED DESCRIPTION
[0021] Before the present compounds, compositions, articles, devices, and/or methods are disclosed and described, it is to be understood that they are not limited to specific synthetic methods or specific treatment methods unless otherwise specified, or to particular reagents unless otherwise specified, as such may, of course, vary. It is also to be understood that the terminology used herein is for the purpose of describing particular embodiments only and is not intended to be limiting.
[0022] Disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions including an effective amount of a compound of Formula I or II:
Figure imgf000007_0001
Formula I or Formula II or a pharmaceutically accepted salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof; and a
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle. These compositions can further include additional agents. These compositions are useful for modulating the activity of GPR35, thus to improve the prevention and treatment of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders.
[0023] In some embodiments R1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when R1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0024] In some embodiments R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N02, -SO2NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy. [0025] In some embodiments R can be -H, -OH, -N02, -S02(NH3), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
[0026] In some embodiments R7, R9, R10, R11 and R12 can each individually be -H, -OH, - N02, -S02NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0027] The disclosed methods also encompass methods for treating or reducing the risk of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders and cancers, including administering to a subject Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition including Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof. The disclosed methods can also include administering to the subject an additional agent separately or in a combination composition with disclosed embodiments or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof.
[0028] Also disclosed are methods for treating GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders and cancers in vivo or in vitro administering Formula I or II, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or prodrug thereof, or a pharmaceutical composition. Formula I or II can be administered in an effective amount to a subject.
A. G Protein-Coupled Receptors (GPCRs)
[0029] G protein coupled receptors are intrinsic membrane proteins which comprise a large superfamily of receptors. The family of G protein-coupled receptors (GPCRs) has at least 250 members (Strader et al. FASEB J., 9:745-754, 1995; Strader et al. Annu. Rev.
Biochem., 63: 101-32, 1994). It has been estimated that one percent of human genes may encode GPCRs. Many GPCRs share a common molecular architecture and common signaling mechanism. Historically, GPCRs have been classified into six families, originally thought to be unrelated, three of which are found in vertebrates. Recent work has identified several new GCPR families and suggested the possibility of a common evolutionary origin for all of them.
[0030] One characteristic feature of most GPCRs is that seven clusters of hydrophobic amino acid residues, or transmembrane regions (TMs, the 7 transmembrane (7TM) regions are designated as TM1 , TM2, TM3, TM4, TM5, TM6, and TM7) are located in the primary structure and pass through (span) the cell membrane at each region thereof. The domains are believed to represent transmembrane alpha-helices connected by three intracellular loops (il, i2, and i3), three extracellular loops (el, e2, and e3), and amino (N)- and carboxyl (C)- terminal domains (Palczewski et al, Science 289, 739-45 (2000)). Most GPCRs have single conserved cysteine residues in each of the first two extracellular loops which form disulfide bonds that are believed to stabilize functional protein structure. It is well known that these structures detailed above are common among G protein coupled receptor proteins and that the amino acid sequences corresponding to the area where the protein passes through the membrane (membrane-spanning region or transmembrane region) and the amino acid sequences near the membrane-spanning region are often highly conserved among the receptors. Thus, due to the high degree of homology in GPCRs, the identification of novel GPCRs, as well identification of both the intracellular and the extracellular portions of such novel members, is readily accomplished by those of skill in the art.
1. GPR35
[0031] GPR35 is a rhodopsin-like GPCR first identified in 1998 (O'Dowd, et al, Genomics 47: 310-313 (1998)). GPR35 was first identified to an orphan GPCR that contains 309 amino acids. GPR35b, a splicing variant that contains an N-terminal extension of 31 amino acids, was later discovered in gastric cancer cells in 2004, and shown to be capable of transforming NIH-3T3 cells (Okumura, et al, , Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135 (2004))). GPR35 has been found to be expressed in various tissues including stomach, gastrointestinal tissues, and mast cells, basophils and eosinophils. Upregulation of GPR35 has also been identified in human mast cells upon challenge with IgE antibodies, in human macrophages after exposure to benzo(a)pyrene, in failing heart cells, and in gastric cancer cells.
[0032] Identification of ligands, particularly the endogenous ligands, that activate GPR35 are desired. To date, there are several agonists for GPR35 reported so far, including kynurenic acid, NPPB, zaprinast, pamoic acid and lysophosphatidic acid (LPA). Both kynurenic acid and LPA are indicated to be an endogenous ligand for GPR35 (Wang, et al, J. Biol. Chem. 281 : 22021-22028 (2006); Oka, et al, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 395: 232-237 (2010)). Both kynurenic acid and LPA elicited several cellular responses in HEK293 cells and/or CHO cells expressing GPR35. For example, in HEK-293 cells expressing GPR35, 2-acyl LPA markedly enhanced the Ca2+ response, the activation of RhoA and the phosphorylation of ERK in GPR35 -expressing cells. 2-Acyl LPA also induced the internalization of the receptor molecules. Nevertheless, it remains unclear whether kynurenic acid or LPA is the natural agonist for GPR35. Recently using a GPR35-P-arrestin-2 interaction assay Jenkins et al, discovered a number of compounds possessing agonist activity on GPR35. These agonists include cromolyn disodium, dicumarol, pamoate, niflumic acid, and luteolin. These compounds active at human GPR35 in the P-arrestin-2 interaction assay were also able to promote cell growth via Gal3 (Jenkins, et al, Biochemical Journal 432, 451-459 (2010)).
[0033] There is a strong need for new drug therapies for the treatment of subjects suffering from or susceptible to pathological conditions or diseases associated with GPR35. In particular, a need still exists for new drugs having one or more improved properties (such as safety profile, efficacy, or physical properties) relative to those currently available.
B. Definitions
[0034] Throughout this application, various publications are referenced. The disclosures of these publications in their entireties are hereby incorporated by reference into this application in order to more fully describe the state of the art to which this pertains. The references disclosed are also individually and specifically incorporated by reference herein for the material contained in them that is discussed in the sentence in which the reference is relied upon.
1. A, an, the
[0035] As used in the specification and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an" and "the" include plural referents unless the context clearly dictates otherwise. Thus, for example, reference to "a pharmaceutical carrier" includes mixtures of two or more such carriers, and the like.
2. Abbreviations
[0036] Abbreviations, which are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art, may be used (e.g., "h" or "hr" for hour or hours, "g" or "gm" for gram(s), "mL" for milliliters, and "rt" for room temperature, "nm" for nanometers, "M" for molar, and like abbreviations).
3. About
[0037] About modifying, for example, the quantity of an ingredient in a composition, concentrations, volumes, process temperature, process time, yields, flow rates, pressures, and like values, and ranges thereof, employed in describing the embodiments of the disclosure, refers to variation in the numerical quantity that can occur, for example, through typical measuring and handling procedures used for making compounds, compositions, concentrates or use formulations; through inadvertent error in these procedures; through differences in the manufacture, source, or purity of starting materials or ingredients used to carry out the methods; and like considerations. The term "about" also encompasses amounts that differ due to aging of a composition or formulation with a particular initial concentration or mixture, and amounts that differ due to mixing or processing a composition or formulation with a particular initial concentration or mixture. Whether modified by the term "about" the claims appended hereto include equivalents to these quantities.
4. Analytical Methods
[0038] An analytical method is for example, a method which measures a molecule or substance. For example, gas chromatography, gel permeation chromatography, high resolution gas chromatography, high resolution mass spectrometry, or mass spectrometry is analytical methods.
5. Assaying
[0039] Assaying, assay, or like terms refers to an analysis to determine a characteristic of a substance, such as a molecule or a cell, such as for example, the presence, absence, quantity, extent, kinetics, dynamics, or type of an a cell's optical or bio impedance response upon stimulation with one or more exogenous stimuli, such as a ligand or marker. Producing a biosensor signal of a cell's response to a stimulus can be an assay.
6. Assaying the response
[0040] "Assaying the response" or like terms means using a means to characterize the response. For example, if a molecule is brought into contact with a cell, a biosensor can be used to assay the response of the cell upon exposure to the molecule.
7. Agonism action
[0041] Agonism action refers to the binding of a molecule to a receptor that leads to the activation of the receptor, thus triggering a cellular response similar to the cellular response for a known agonist for the receptor.
8. Antagonism action
[0042] Antagonism action refers to the binding of a molecule to a receptor that leads to the inhibition of the receptor. 9. Agonism and antagonism mode
[0043] The agonism mode or like terms is the assay wherein the cells are exposed to a molecule to determine the ability of the molecule to trigger biosensor signals such as DMR signals, while the antagonism mode is the assay wherein the cells are exposed to a maker in the presence of a molecule to determine the ability of the molecule to modulate the biosensor signal of cells responding to the marker.
10. Anti-inflammation agent
[0044] An antinflammatory agent is any agent that has an anti-inflammatory activity. Examples of anti-inflammation agent are Cox inhibitors such as ibuprofen, aspirin, tylenol, or GPR35 agonists, or GPR35-hERG complex activators.
11. Anti-metabolic-disorder agent
[0045] An anti-metabolic disorder agent is any agent that has an effect in suppressing, reducing, or preventing diseases associated with metabolic disorders. Metabolism is the process human body uses to get or make energy from the food. Food is made up of proteins, carbohydrates and fats. Chemicals in digestive system break the food parts down into sugars and acids, thus providing fuels. The body can use this fuel right away, or it can store the energy in tissues, such as liver, muscles and body fat. A metabolic disorder occurs when abnormal chemical reactions in human body disrupt this process. When this happens, one might have too much of some substances or too little of other ones that one need to stay healthy.
12. Anti-congestive-heart-failure agent
[0046] An anti-congestive heart failure agent is any agent that has an effect in
suppressing, reducing, or preventing diseases associated with congestive heart failure, such as a diuretic.
13. Anti-cancer agent
[0047] An anti-cancer agent is any agent that has an anti-cancer effect, such as vinblastine or taxol.
14. Biosensor
[0048] Biosensor or like terms refer to a device for the detection of an analyte that combines a biological component with a physico chemical detector component. The biosensor typically consists of three parts: a biological component or element (such as tissue, microorganism, pathogen, cells, or combinations thereof), a detector element (works in a physicochemical way such as optical, piezoelectric, electrochemical, thermometric, or magnetic), and a transducer associated with both components. The biological component or element can be, for example, a living cell, a pathogen, or combinations thereof. In
embodiments, an optical biosensor can comprise an optical transducer for converting a molecular recognition or molecular stimulation event in a living cell, a pathogen, or combinations thereof into a quantifiable signal. Typical biosensors used for label- free cellular assays are surface plasmon resonance, plasmon resonance imaging, resonant waveguide grating biosensor, photonic crystal biosensor, and electric impedance biosensors.
15. Biosensor Response
[0049] A "biosensor response", "biosensor output signal", "biosensor signal" or like terms is any reaction of a sensor system having a cell to a cellular response. A biosensor converts a cellular response to a quantifiable sensor response. A biosensor response is an optical response upon stimulation as measured by an optical biosensor such as surface plasmon resonance (SPR) or resonant waveguide grating (RWG) biosensor or it is a bioimpedence response of the cells upon stimulation as measured by an electric biosensor. Since a biosensor response is directly associated with the cellular response upon stimulation, the biosensor response and the cellular response can be used interchangeably, in
embodiments of disclosure.
16. Biosensor Signal
[0050] A "biosensor signal" or like terms refers to the signal of cells measured with a biosensor that is produced by the response of a cell upon stimulation.
17. Biosensor Index
[0051] A "biosensor index" or like terms is an index made up of a collection of biosensor data. A biosensor index can be a collection of biosensor profiles, such as primary profiles, or secondary profiles. The index can be comprised of any type of data. For example, an index of profiles could be comprised of just an N-DMR data point, it could be a P-DMR data point, or both or it could be an impedence data point. It could be all of the data points associated with the profile curve.
18. Cell
[0052] The term "cell" as used herein also refers to individual cells, cell lines, or cultures derived from such cells. A "culture" refers to a composition comprising isolated cells of the same or a different type. The term co-culture is used to designate when more than one type of cell are cultured together in the same dish with either full or partial contact with each other. A cell can be a recombinantly engineered cell wherein the cell comprises exogenous nucleic acid.
[0053] Cell refers not only to the particular subject cell but to the progeny or potential progeny of such a cell. Because certain modifications may occur in succeeding generations due to either mutation or environmental influences, such progeny may not, in fact, be identical to the parent cell, but are still included within the scope of the term as used herein.
19. Cell culture
[0054] "Cell culture" or "cell culturing" refers to the process by which either prokaryotic or eukaryotic cells are grown under controlled conditions. "Cell culture" not only refers to the culturing of cells derived from multicellular eukaryotes, especially animal cells, but also the culturing of complex tissues and organs.
20. Cell panel
[0055] A "cell panel" or like terms is a panel which comprises at least two types of cells. The cells can be of any type or combination disclosed herein.
21. Cellular Response
[0056] A "cellular response" or like terms is any reaction by the cell to a stimulation.
22. Cellular process
[0057] A cellular process or like terms is a process that takes place in or by a cell.
Examples of cellular process include, but not limited to, proliferation, apoptosis, necrosis, differentiation, cell signal transduction, polarity change, migration, or transformation.
23. Cellular target
[0058] A "cellular target" or like terms is a biopolymer such as a protein or nucleic acid whose activity can be modified by an external stimulus. Cellular targets are most commonly proteins such as enzymes, kinases, ion channels, and receptors.
24. Characterizing
[0059] Characterizing or like terms refers to gathering information about any property of a substance, such as a ligand, molecule, marker, or cell, such as obtaining a profile for the ligand, molecule, marker, or cell.
25. Chemistry definitions
[0060] The term "alkyl" refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbyl substituent (i.e., a substituent obtained from a hydrocarbon by removal of a hydrogen) containing from one to twenty carbon atoms; in one embodiment from one to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from one to ten carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from one to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from one to three carbon atoms. Examples of such substituents include methyl, ethyl, propyl (including n-propyl and isopropyl), butyl (including n-butyl, isobutyl, sec-butyl and tert-butyl), pentyl, iso-amyl, hexyl and the like.
[0061] The term "alkenyl" refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbyl substituent containing one or more double bonds and from two to twenty carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from two to four carbon atoms. Examples of alkenyl include ethenyl (also known as vinyl), allyl, propenyl (including 1-propenyl and 2- propenyl) and butenyl (including 1-butenyl, 2-butenyl and 3-butenyl). The term "alkenyl" includes substituents having "cis" and "trans" orientations, or alternatively, "E" and "Z" orientations.
[0062] The term "alkynyl" refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbyl substituent containing one or more triple bonds and from two to twenty carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to twelve carbon atoms; in another embodiment, from two to six carbon atoms; and in another embodiment, from two to four carbon atoms. Examples of alkynyl include ethynyl, propynyl, butynyl, pentynyl, hexynyl, methylpropynyl, 4-methyl-l- butynyl,4-propyl-2 -pentynyl- , and 4-butyl-2-hexynyl.
[0063] The term "benzyl" refers to methyl radical substituted with phenyl, i.e., the
following structure:
Figure imgf000015_0001
[0064] The term "carbocyclic ring" refers to a saturated cyclic, partially saturated cyclic, or aromatic ring containing from 3 to 14 carbon ring atoms ("ring atoms" are the atoms bound together to form the ring). A carbocyclic ring typically contains from 3 to 10 carbon ring atoms. Examples include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and phenyl. A "carbocyclic ring system" alternatively may be 2 or 3 rings fused together, such as naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthalenyl (also known as "tetralinyl"), indenyl, isoindenyl, indanyl,
bicyclodecanyl, anthracenyl, phenanthrene, benzonaphthenyl (also known as "phenalenyl"), fluorenyl, and decalinyl. [0065] The term "heterocyclic ring" refers to a saturated cyclic, partially saturated cyclic, or aromatic ring containing from 3 to 14 ring atoms ("ring atoms" are the atoms bound together to form the ring), in which at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom that is oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, with the remaining ring atoms being independently selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. A heterocycloalkyl alternatively may comprise 2 or 3 rings fused together, wherein at least one such ring contains a heteroatom as a ring atom (e.g., nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur). In a group that has a heterocycloalkyl substituent, the ring atom of the heterocycloalkyl substituent that is bound to the group may be the at least one heteroatom, or it may be a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom. Similarly, if the
heterocycloalkyl substituent is in turn substituted with a group or substituent, the group or substituent may be bound to the at least one heteroatom, or it may be bound to a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom. The term "heterocyclic ring" also includes substituents that are fused to a C6-Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered heteroaryl, wherein a group having such a fused heterocyclic group as a substituent is bound to a heteroatom of the heterocyclic group or to a carbon atom of the heterocycloalkyl group. When such a fused heterocycloalkyl group is substituted with one more substituents, the one or more substituents, unless otherwise specified, are each bound to a heteroatom of the heterocyclocalkyl group or to a carbon atom of the heterocyclic group. The fused C6-Cio aryl ring or to a 5-10-membered heteroaryl ring may be optionally substituted with halogen, Ci-C6 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, or =0
[0066] The term "cycloalkyl" refers to a saturated carbocyclic substituent having three to fourteen carbon atoms. In one embodiment, a cycloalkyl substituent has three to ten carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkyl include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl and cyclohexyl. The term "cycloalkyl" also includes substituents that are fused to a C6-Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered hetero aromatic ring, wherein a group having such a fused cycloalkyl group as a substituent is bound to a carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group. When such a fused cycloalkyl group is substituted with one or more substituents, the one or more substituents, unless otherwise specified, are each bound to a carbon atom of the cycloalkyl group. The fused C6-Cio aromatic ring or to a 5-10-membered hetero aromatic ring may be optionally substituted with halogen, Ci-C6 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, or =0.
[0067] The term "cycloalkenyl" refers to a partially unsaturated carbocyclic substituent having three to fourteen carbon atoms, typically three to ten carbon atoms. Examples of cycloalkenyl include cyclobutenyl, cyclopentenyl, and cyclohexenyl.
[0068] A cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl may be a single ring, which typically contains from 3 to 6 ring atoms. Examples include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclopentenyl, cyclopentadienyl, cyclohexyl, cyclohexenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and phenyl. Alternatively, 2 or 3 rings may be fused together, such as bicyclodecanyl and decalinyl.
[0069] The term "aryl" refers to an aromatic substituent containing one ring or two or three fused rings. The aryl substituent may have six to eighteen carbon atoms. As an example, the aryl substituent may have six to fourteen carbon atoms. The term "aryl" may refer to substituents such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl. The term "aryl" also includes substituents such as phenyl, naphthyl and anthracenyl that are fused to a C4-C10 carbocyclic ring, such as a C5 or a C6 carbocyclic ring, or to a 4-10-membered heterocyclic ring, wherein a group having such a fused aryl group as a substituent is bound to an aromatic carbon of the aryl group. When such a fused aryl group is substituted with one more substituents, the one or more substituents, unless otherwise specified, are each bound to an aromatic carbon of the fused aryl group. The fused C4-C10 carbocyclic or 4-10-membered heterocyclic ring may be optionally substituted with halogen, Ci-C6 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, or =0. Examples of aryl groups include accordingly phenyl, naphthalenyl, tetrahydronaphthalenyl (also known as "tetralinyl"), indenyl, isoindenyl, indanyl, anthracenyl, phenanthrenyl, benzonaphthenyl (also known as "phenalenyl"), and fluorenyl.
[0070] The term "heteroaryl" refers to an aromatic ring structure containing from 5 to 14 ring atoms in which at least one of the ring atoms is a heteroatom (i.e., oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur), with the remaining ring atoms being independently selected from the group consisting of carbon, oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur. A heteroaryl may be a single ring or 2 or 3 fused rings. Examples of heteroaryl substituents include 6-membered ring substituents such as pyridyl, pyrazyl, pyrimidinyl, and pyridazinyl; 5-membered ring substituents such as triazolyl, imidazolyl, furanyl, thiophenyl, pyrazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, 1,2,3-, 1,2,4-, 1,2,5-, or 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl and isothiazolyl; 6/5-membered fused ring substituents such as benzothio furanyl, isobenzothio furanyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, purinyl, and anthranilyl; and 6/6-membered fused rings such as quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, quinazolinyl, and 1 ,4-benzoxazinyl. In a group that has a heteroaryl substituent, the ring atom of the heteroaryl substituent that is bound to the group may be the at least one heteroatom, or it may be a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom. Similarly, if the heteroaryl substituent is in turn substituted with a group or substituent, the group or substituent may be bound to the at least one heteroatom, or it may be bound to a ring carbon atom, where the ring carbon atom may be in the same ring as the at least one heteroatom or where the ring carbon atom may be in a different ring from the at least one heteroatom. The term "heteroaryl" also includes pyridyl N-oxides and groups containing a pyridine N-oxide ring.
[0071] The term "hydrogen" refers to hydrogen substituent, and may be depicted as -H.
[0072] The term "hydroxy" refers to -OH. When used in combination with another term(s), the prefix "hydroxy" indicates that the substituent to which the prefix is attached is substituted with one or more hydroxy substituents. Compounds bearing a carbon to which one or more hydroxy substituents include, for example, alcohols, enols and phenol.
[0073] The term "hydroxyalkyl" refers to an alkyl that is substituted with at least one hydroxy substituent. Examples of hydroxyalkyl include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl, hydroxypropyl and hydro xybutyl.
[0074] The term "nitro" means -N02.
[0075] The term "cyano" (also referred to as "nitrile") -CN, which also may be
C depicted
[0076] The term "carbonyl" means -C(O)-, which also may be depicted as:
Figure imgf000018_0001
[0077] The term "amino" refers to -NR2. An amino group can be a primary, secondary or tertiary amino group. Each R in -NR2 can individually be -H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynykl, aryl, heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or heterocyclyl. [0078] The term "alkylamino" refers to an amino group, wherein at least one alkyl chain is bonded to the amino nitrogen in place of a hydrogen atom. Examples of alkylamino substituents include mono alkylamino such as methylamino (exemplified by the formula
-NH(CH3)), which may also be depicted:
Figure imgf000019_0001
and dialkylamino such as dimethylamino, (exemplified by the formula -N(CH3)2), which may also be depicted:
Figure imgf000019_0002
[0079] The term "amino carbonyl" means -C(0)-NH2, which also may be depicted
Figure imgf000019_0003
[0080] The term "halogen" refers to fluorine (which may be depicted as -F), chlorine (which may be depicted as -CI), bromine (which may be depicted as -Br), or iodine (which may be depicted as -I). In one embodiment, the halogen is chlorine. In another embodiment, the halogen is a fluorine.
[0081] The prefix "halo" indicates that the substituent to which the prefix is attached is substituted with one or more independently selected halogen substituents. For example, haloalkyl refers to an alkyl that is substituted with at least one halogen substituent. Where more than one hydrogen is replaced with halogens, the halogens may be the identical or different. Examples of haloalkyls include chloromethyl, dichloromethyl,
difluorochloromethyl, dichlorofluoromethyl, trichloromethyl, 1-bromoethyl, fluoromethyl, difluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, difluoro ethyl, pentafluoroethyl, difluoropropyl, dichloropropyl, and heptafluoropropyl. Illustrating further, "haloalkoxy" refers to an alkoxy that is substituted with at least one halogen substituent. Examples of haloalkoxy substituents include chloromethoxy, 1-bromoethoxy, fluoromethoxy,
difluoromethoxy, trifluoromethoxy (also known as "perfluoromethyloxy"), and
2,2,2-trifluoroethoxy. It should be recognized that if a substituent is substituted by more than one halogen substituent, those halogen substituents may be identical or different (unless otherwise stated). [0082] The prefix "perhalo" indicates that each hydrogen substituent on the substituent to which the prefix is attached is replaced with an independently selected halogen substituent. If all the halogen substituents are identical, the prefix may identify the halogen substituent. Thus, for example, the term "perfluoro" means that every hydrogen substituent on the substituent to which the prefix is attached is replaced with a fluorine substituent. To illustrate, the term "perfiuoroalkyl" refers to an alkyl substituent wherein a fluorine substituent is in the place of each hydrogen substituent. Examples of perfiuoroalkyl substituents include trifluoromethyl (-CF3), perfluorobutyl, perfluoroisopropyl,
perfluorododecyl, and perfluoro decyl. To illustrate further, the term "perfluoroalkoxy" refers to an alkoxy substituent wherein each hydrogen substituent is replaced with a fluorine substituent. Examples of perfluoroalkoxy substituents include trifluoromethoxy (-0-CF3), perfluorobutoxy, perfluoroisopropoxy, perfluorododecoxy, and perfluorodecoxy.
[0083] The term "oxo" refers to =0.
[0084] The term "oxy" refers to an ether substituent, and may be depicted as -0-.
[0085] The term "alkoxy" refers to an alkyl linked to an oxygen, which may also be represented as -O-R, wherein the R represents the alkyl group. Examples of alkoxy include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy and butoxy.
[0086] The term "alkylthio" means -S-alkyl. For example, "methylthio" is -S-CH3.
Other examples of alkylthio include ethylthio, propylthio, butylthio, and hexylthio.
[0087] The term "alkylcarbonyl" means -C(0)-alkyl. For example, "ethylcarbonyl" may
Figure imgf000020_0001
Examples of other alkylcarbonyl include methylcarbonyl, propylcarbonyl, butylcarbonyl, pentylcabonyl, and hexylcarbonyl.
[0088] The term "amino alkylcarbonyl" means -C(0)-alkyl-NH2. For example,
'aminomethylcarbonyl" may be depicted as:
Figure imgf000020_0002
[0089] The term "alkoxycarbonyl" means -C(0)-0-alkyl. For example,
"ethoxycarbonyl" may be depicted as:
Figure imgf000021_0001
. Examples of other alkoxycarbonyl include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, propoxycarbonyl,
butoxycarbonyl, pentoxycarbonyl, and hexyloxycarbonyl. In another embodiment, where the carbon atom of the carbonyl is attached to a carbon atom of a second alkyl, the resulting functional group is an ester.
[0090] The terms "thio" and "thia" mean a divalent sulfur atom and such a substituent may be depicted as -S-. For example, a thioether is represented as "alkyl-thio-alkyl" or, alternatively, alkyl-S-alkyl.
[0091] The term "thiol" refers to a sulfhydryl substituent, and may be depicted as -SH.
[0092] The term "thione" refers to =S.
term "sulfonyl" refers to -S(0)2-, which also may be depicted
Figure imgf000021_0002
. Thus, for example, "alkyl-sulfonyl-alkyl" refers to alkyl-S(0)2-alkyl.
Examples of alkylsulfonyl include methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, and propylsulfonyl.
[0094] The term "amino sulfonyl" means -S(0)2-NH2, which also may be depicted
Figure imgf000021_0003
[0095] The term "sulfinyl" or "sulfoxido" means -S(O)-, which also may be depicted as:
Figure imgf000021_0004
[0096] Thus, for example, "alkylsulfinylalkyl" or "alkylsulfoxidoalkyl" refers to alkyl-S(0)-alkyl. Exemplary alkylsulfmyl groups include methylsulfmyl, ethylsulfinyl, butylsulfinyl, and hexylsulfinyl.
[0097] Examples of single-ring heteroaryls include furanyl, dihydrofuranyl,
tetradydrofuranyl, thiophenyl (also known as "thiofuranyl"), dihydrothiophenyl, tetrahydrothiophenyl, pyrrolyl, isopyrrolyl, pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, imidazolyl, isoimidazolyl, imidazolinyl, imidazolidinyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, dithiolyl, oxathiolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl, thiazolinyl, isothiazolinyl, thiazolidinyl, isothiazolidinyl, thiaediazolyl, oxathiazolyl, oxadiazolyl (including oxadiazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl (also known as "azoximyl"), 1,2,5-oxadiazolyl (also known as "furazanyl"), or 1,3,4-oxadiazolyl), oxatriazolyl (including
1,2,3,4-oxatriazolyl or 1,2,3,5-oxatriazolyl), dioxazolyl (including 1,2,3-dioxazolyl,
1.2.4- dioxazolyl, 1,3,2-dioxazolyl, or 1,3,4-dioxazolyl), oxathiazolyl, oxathiolyl,
oxathiolanyl, pyranyl (including 1,2-pyranyl or 1,4-pyranyl), dihydropyranyl, pyridinyl (also known as "azinyl"), piperidinyl, diazinyl (including pyridazinyl (also known as
"1,2-diazinyl"), pyrimidinyl (also known as "1,3 -diazinyl" or "pyrimidyl"), or pyrazinyl (also known as "1,4-diazinyl")), piperazinyl, triazinyl (including s-triazinyl (also known as "1,3,5-triazinyl"), as-triazinyl (also known 1,2,4-triazinyl), and v-triazinyl (also known as "1,2,3-triazinyi")), oxazinyl (including 1,2,3-oxazinyl, 1,3,2-oxazinyl, 1,3,6-oxazinyl (also known as "pentoxazolyl"), 1,2,6-oxazinyl, or 1 ,4-oxazinyl), isoxazinyl (including
o-isoxazinyl or p-isoxazinyl), oxazolidinyl, isoxazolidinyl, oxathiazinyl (including
1.2.5- oxathiazinyl or 1,2,6-oxathiazinyl), oxadiazinyl (including 1,4,2-oxadiazinyl or 1,3,5,2-oxadiazinyl), morpholinyl, azepinyl, oxepinyl, thiepinyl, and diazepinyl.
[0098] Examples of 2-fused-ring heteroaryls include, indolizinyl, pyrindinyl,
pyranopyrrolyl, 4H-quinolizinyl, purinyl, naphthyridinyl, pyridopyridinyl (including pyrido[3,4-b]-pyridinyl, pyrido [3, 2-b] -pyridinyl, or pyrido[4,3-b]-pyridinyl), and pteridinyl, indolyl, isoindolyl, indoleninyl, isoindazolyl, benzazinyl, phthalazinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, benzo diazinyl, benzopyranyl, benzothiopyranyl, benzoxazolyl, indoxazinyl, anthranilyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxanyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzoiuranyl, isobenzoiuranyl, benzothienyl, isobenzothienyl, benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzo triazolyl, benzo xazinyl, benzisoxazinyl, and tetrahydroisoquinolinyl.
[0099] Examples of 3-fused-ring heteroaryls or heterocycloalkyls include
5,6-dihydro-4H-imidazo[4,5, l-ij]quinoline, 4,5-dihydroimidazo[4,5,l-hi]indole,
4,5,6,7-tetrahydroimidazo[4,5,l-jk][l]benzazepine, and dibenzofuranyl.
[0100] Other examples of fused-ring heteroaryls include benzo-fused heteroaryls such as indolyl, isoindolyl (also known as "isobenzazolyl" or "pseudoisoindolyl"), indoleninyl (also known as "pseudoindolyl"), isoindazolyl (also known as "benzpyrazolyl"), benzazinyl (including quinolinyl (also known as "1-benzazinyl") or isoquinolinyl (also known as "2-benzazinyl")), phthalazinyl, quinoxalinyl, quinazolinyl, benzodiazinyl (including cinnolinyl (also known as "1,2-benzodiazinyl") or quinazolinyl (also known as
"1,3-benzodiazinyl")), benzopyranyl (including "chromanyl" or "isochromanyl"), benzothiopyranyl (also known as "thiochromanyl"), benzoxazolyl, indoxazinyl (also known as "benzisoxazolyl"), anthranilyl, benzodioxolyl, benzodioxanyl, benzoxadiazolyl, benzofuranyl (also known as "coumaronyl"), isobenzofuranyl, benzothienyl (also known as "benzothiophenyl," "thionaphthenyl," or "benzothiofuranyl"), isobenzothienyl (also known as "isobenzothiophenyl," "isothionaphthenyl," or "isobenzothiofuranyl"), benzothiazolyl, benzothiadiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzotriazolyl, benzoxazinyl (including
1,3,2-benzoxazinyl , 1,4,2-benzoxazinyl , 2,3,1 -benzoxazinyl , or 3,1,4-benzoxazinyl ), benzisoxazinyl (including 1 ,2-benzisoxazinyl or 1,4-benzisoxazinyl), tetrahydroisoquinolinyl , carbazolyl, xanthenyl, and acridinyl.
[0101] The term "heteroaryl" also includes substituents such as pyridyl and quinolinyl that are fused to a C4-C10 carbocyclic ring, such as a C5 or a C6 carbocyclic ring, or to a 4-10- membered heterocyclic ring, wherein a group having such a fused aryl group as a substituent is bound to an aromatic carbon of the heteroaryl group or to a heteroatom of the heteroaryl group. When such a fused heteroaryl group is substituted with one more substituents, the one or more substituents, unless otherwise specified, are each bound to an aromatic carbon of the heteroaryl group or to a heteroatom of the heteroaryl group. The fused C4-C10 carbocyclic or 4-10-membered heterocyclic ring may be optionally substituted with halogen, Ci-C6 alkyl, C3-C10 cycloalkyl, or =0.
[0102] A substituent is "substitutable" if it comprises at least one carbon, sulfur, oxygen or nitrogen atom that is bonded to one or more hydrogen atoms. Thus, for example, hydrogen, halogen, and cyano do not fall within this definition. If a substituent is described as being "substituted," a non-hydrogen substituent is in the place of a hydrogen substituent on a carbon, oxygen, sulfur or nitrogen of the substituent. Thus, for example, a substituted alkyl substituent is an alkyl substituent wherein at least one non-hydrogen substituent is in the place of a hydrogen substituent on the alkyl substituent. To illustrate, monofluoroalkyl is alkyl substituted with a fluoro substituent, and difluoroalkyl is alkyl substituted with two fluoro substituents. It should be recognized that if there is more than one substitution on a substituent, each non-hydrogen substituent may be identical or different (unless otherwise stated).
[0103] If a substituent is described as being "optionally substituted," the substituent may be either (1) not substituted, or (2) substituted. If a carbon of a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with one or more of a list of substituents, one or more of the hydrogens on the carbon (to the extent there are any) may separately and/or together be replaced with an independently selected optional substituent. If a nitrogen of a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with one or more of a list of substituents, one or more of the hydrogens on the nitrogen (to the extent there are any) may each be replaced with an independently selected optional substituent. One exemplary substituent may be depicted as -NR'R," wherein R' and R" together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached, may form a heterocyclic ring. The heterocyclic ring formed from R' and R" together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached may be partially or fully saturated. In one embodiment, the heterocyclic ring consists of 3 to 7 atoms. In another embodiment, the heterocyclic ring is selected from the group consisting of pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, isoxazolyl, pyridyl and thiazolyl.
[0104] This specification uses the terms "substituent," "radical," and "group"
interchangeably. If a group of substituents are collectively described as being optionally substituted by one or more of a list of substituents, the group may include: (1) unsubstitutable substituents, (2) substitutable substituents that are not substituted by the optional substituents, and/or (3) substitutable substituents that are substituted by one or more of the optional substituents. If a substituent is described as being optionally substituted with up to a particular number of non-hydrogen substituents, that substituent may be either (1) not substituted; or (2) substituted by up to that particular number of non-hydrogen substituents or by up to the maximum number of substitutable positions on the substituent, whichever is less. Thus, for example, if a substituent is described as a heteroaryl optionally substituted with up to 3 non-hydrogen substituents, then any heteroaryl with less than 3 substitutable positions would be optionally substituted by up to only as many non-hydrogen substituents as the heteroaryl has substitutable positions. To illustrate, tetrazolyl (which has only one substitutable position) would be optionally substituted with up to one non-hydrogen substituent. To illustrate further, if an amino nitrogen is described as being optionally substituted with up to 2 non-hydrogen substituents, then the nitrogen will be optionally substituted with up to 2 non-hydrogen substituents if the amino nitrogen is a primary nitrogen, whereas the amino nitrogen will be optionally substituted with up to only 1 non- hydrogen substituent if the amino nitrogen is a secondary nitrogen.
[0105] When a substituent is comprised of multiple moieties, unless otherwise indicated, it is the intention for the final moiety to serve as the point of attachment to the remainder of the molecule. For example, in a substituent A-B-C, moiety C is attached to the remainder of the molecule. In a substituent A-B-C-D, moiety D is attached to the remainder of the molecule. Similarly, in a substituent amino carbonylmethyl, the methyl moiety is attached to the remainder of the molecule, where the substituent may also be depicted as
Figure imgf000025_0001
In a substituent trifluoromethylaminocarbonyl, the carbonyl moiety is atta hed to the remainder of the molecule, where the substituent may also be depicted as
Figure imgf000025_0002
[0106] If substituents are described as being "independently selected" from a group, each substituent is selected independent of the other. Each substituent therefore may be identical to or different from the other substituent(s).
26. Compound interchangeability
[0107] For the purposes of the present disclosure the terms "compound" and
"composition of matter" stand equally well for the chemical entities described herein, including all enantiomeric forms, diastereomeric forms, salts, and the like, and the terms "compound" and "composition of matter" are used interchangeably throughout the present specification.
27. Components
[0108] Disclosed are the components to be used to prepare the disclosed compositions as well as the compositions themselves to be used within the methods disclosed herein. These and other materials are disclosed herein, and it is understood that when combinations, subsets, interactions, groups, etc. of these materials are disclosed that while specific reference of each various individual and collective combinations and permutation of these compounds may not be explicitly disclosed, each is specifically contemplated and described herein. Thus, if a class of molecules A, B, and C are disclosed as well as a class of molecules D, E, and F and an example of a combination molecule, A-D is disclosed, then even if each is not individually recited each is individually and collectively contemplated meaning
combinations, A-E, A-F, B-D, B-E, B-F, C-D, C-E, and C-F are considered disclosed.
Likewise, any subset or combination of these is also disclosed. Thus, for example, the subgroup of A-E, B-F, and C-E would be considered disclosed. This concept applies to all aspects of this application including, but not limited to, steps in methods of making and using the disclosed compositions. Thus, if there are a variety of additional steps that can be performed it is understood that each of these additional steps can be performed with any specific embodiment or combination of embodiments of the disclosed methods.
28. Contacting
[0109] Contacting or like terms means bringing into proximity such that a molecular interaction can take place, if a molecular interaction is possible between at least two things, such as molecules, cells, markers, at least a compound or composition, or at least two compositions, or any of these with an article(s) or with a machine. For example, contacting refers to bringing at least two compositions, molecules, articles, or things into contact, i.e., such that they are in proximity to mix or touch. For example, having a solution of
composition A and cultured cell B and pouring solution of composition A over cultured cell B would be bringing solution of composition A in contact with cell culture B. Contacting a cell with a ligand would be bringing a ligand to the cell to ensure the cell have access to the ligand.
[0110] It is understood that anything disclosed herein can be brought into contact with anything else. For example, a cell can be brought into contact with a marker or a molecule, a biosensor, and so forth.
29. Compounds and compositions
[0111] Compounds and compositions have their standard meaning in the art. It is understood that wherever, a particular designation, such as a molecule, substance, marker, cell, or reagent compositions comprising, consisting of, and consisting essentially of these designations are disclosed. Thus, where the particular designation marker is used, it is understood that also disclosed would be compositions comprising that marker, consisting of that marker, or consisting essentially of that marker. Where appropriate wherever a particular designation is made, it is understood that the compound of that designation is also disclosed. For example, if particular biological material, such as EGF, is disclosed EGF in its compound form is also disclosed.
30. Control
[0112] The terms "control" or "control levels" or "control cells" are defined as the standard by which a change is measured, for example, the controls are not subjected to the experiment, but are instead subjected to a defined set of parameters, or the controls are based on pre- or post- treatment levels. They can either be run in parallel with or before or after a test run, or they can be a pre-determined standard.
31. Clathrate
[0113] A compound may form a complex such as a "clathrate", a drug-host inclusion complex, wherein, in contrast to solvates, the drug and host are present in stoichiometric or non-stoichiometric amounts. A compound used herein can also contain two or more organic and/or inorganic components which can be in stoichiometric or non- stoichiometric amounts. The resulting complexes can be ionised, partially ionised, or non-ionised. For a review of such complexes, see J. Pharm. ScL, 64 (8), 1269-1288, by Haleblian (August 1975).
32. Congestive heart failure
[0114] Congestive heart failure (CHF) is a condition in which the heart's function as a pump to deliver oxygen rich blood to the body is inadequate to meet the body's needs.
Congestive heart failure can be caused by diseases that weaken the heart muscle, or diseases that cause stiffening of the heart muscles, or diseases that increase oxygen demand by the body tissue beyond the capability of the heart to deliver. Many diseases can impair the pumping action of the ventricles. For example, the muscles of the ventricles can be weakened by heart attacks or infections (myocarditis). The diminished pumping ability of the ventricles due to muscle weakening is called systolic dysfunction. After each ventricular contraction (systole) the ventricle muscles need to relax to allow blood from the atria to fill the ventricles. This relaxation of the ventricles is called diastole. Diseases such as hemochromatosis or amyloidosis can cause stiffening of the heart muscle and impair the ventricles' capacity to relax and fill; this is referred to as diastolic dysfunction. The most common cause of this is longstanding high blood pressure resulting in a thickened (hypertrophied) heart. Additionally, in some patients, although the pumping action and filling capacity of the heart may be normal, abnormally high oxygen demand by the body's tissues (for example, with hyperthyroidism) may make it difficult for the heart to supply an adequate blood flow (called high output heart failure). In some patients one or more of these factors can be present to cause congestive heart failure. Congestive heart failure can affect many organs of the body. For example, the weakened heart muscles may not be able to supply enough blood to the kidneys, which then begin to lose their normal ability to excrete salt (sodium) and water. This diminished kidney function can cause to body to retain more fluid. The lungs may become congested with fluid (pulmonary edema) and the person's ability to exercise is decreased. Fluid may likewise accumulate in the liver, thereby impairing its ability to rid the body of toxins and produce essential proteins. The intestines may become less efficient in absorbing nutrients and medicines. Over time, untreated, worsening congestive heart failure will affect virtually every organ in the body.
33. Cancer
[0115] Cancer is a disease of inadequately controlled differentiation or division of cells, such as prostate cancer, leukemia, hormone dependent cancers, breast cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, epidermal cancer, liver cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the brain, and cancer of the kidney. Cancer is a collection of diseases that arise from the progressive accumulation of genetic alterations in somatic cells. Cancer is also viewed as a pathway dysregulated disease - a small number of core pathways are dominate in aberrant cell growth leading to cancer. The ability of tumor cells to outgrow their neighboring cells is often driven by constitutive activation of downstream proteins. Genetic studies over several decades have discovered a wide range of tumor- associated genes and their mutations, many of which preferentially occur in signaling proteins involved in a small number of pathways. Genetic mutations are often enriched in positive regulatory loops (gain of function), and methylated genes in negative regulatory loops (loss of function), leading to the disruption of the normal cooperative behavior of cells and thus promoting tumor pheno types. A hallmark in the onset of cancer is how mutated proteins alter and govern signaling of cancer cells in the context of intracellular or intercellular signaling networks.
34. Cross-desensitization DMR assay
[0116] A cross-desensitization DMR assay is a label- free optical biosensor cellular assay that measures the ability of a molecule to desensitize the cellular response mediated by either a hERG activator such as mallotoxin or a GPR35 agonist such as zaprinast or YE210, in a hERG and GPR35 co-expressing cell or a GPR35 expressing cell, wherein the molecule itself also exhibits agonism activity in said cell.
35. Detect
[0117] Detect or like terms refer to an ability of the apparatus and methods of the disclosure to discover or sense a molecule- or a marker-induced cellular response and to distinguish the sensed responses for distinct molecules.
36. Direct action (of a drug candidate molecule)
[0118] A "direct action" or like terms is a result (of a drug candidate molecule") acting independently on a cell.
37. DMR index
[0119] A "DMR index" or like terms is a biosensor index made up of a collection of DMR data.
38. DMR signal
[0120] A "DMR signal" or like terms refers to the signal of cells measured with an optical biosensor that is produced by the response of a cell upon stimulation.
39. DMR response
[0121] A "DMR response" or like terms is a biosensor response using an optical biosensor. The DMR refers to dynamic mass redistribution or dynamic cellular matter redistribution. A P-DMR is a positive DMR response, a N-DMR is a negative DMR response, and a RP-DMR is a recovery P-DMR response.
40. Disease marker
[0122] A disease marker is any reagent, molecule, substance, etc, that can be used for identifying, diagnosing, or prognosing for a GPR35 related disease.
41. Drug candidate molecule
[0123] A drug candidate molecule or like terms is a test molecule which is being tested for its ability to function as a drug or a pharmacophore. This molecule may be considered as a lead molecule.
42. Efficacy
[0124] Efficacy or like terms is the capacity to produce a desired size of an effect under ideal or optimal conditions. It is these conditions that distinguish efficacy from the related concept of effectiveness, which relates to change under real-life conditions. Efficacy is the relationship between receptor occupancy and the ability to initiate a response at the molecular, cellular, tissue or system level.
43. Electrophysiology method
[0125] An electrophysiology method is any method which studies the electrical properties of biological cells and tissues. It involves measurements of voltage change or electric current on a wide variety of scales from single ion channel proteins to whole organs like the heart. In neuroscience, it includes measurements of the electrical activity of neurons, and particularly action potential activity. Recordings of large-scale electric signals from the nervous system such as electroencephalography, may also be referred to as
electrophysiological recordings.
44. Engineered cell
[0126] An engineered cell is any cell in which one or more genes have been added or removed (via genetic blockage, such as homolgous recombination or siRNAa plasmid) or altered in either a transient or permenant fashion. The term "engineered cell" refers to a cell which has been manipulated to comprise exogenous material, such as nucleic acid. For example, disclosed herein are engineered cells which have been manipulated to comprise exogenous GPR35, exogenous hERG or both.
45. Fusion protein
[0127] A "fusion protein" is a protein or a peptide located either on the C- or N- terminal of the target protein, which facilitates one or several of the following characteristics: (1) improved solubility - Fusion of the N-terminus of the target protein to the C-terminus of a soluble fusion partner often improves the solubility of the target protein; (2) improved detection - Fusion of the target protein to either terminus of a short peptide (epitope tag) or protein which is recognized by an antibody (Western blot analysis) or by biophysical methods (e.g. GFP by fluorescence) facilitates the detection of the resulting protein during expression or purification; (3) improved purification - Simple purification schemes have been developed for proteins used at either terminus which bind specifically to affinity resins; (4) Localization - Tag, usually located on N-terminus of the target protein, which acts as address for sending protein to a specific cellular compartment; (5) improved Expression (E)- Fusion of the N-terminus of the target protein to the C-terminus of a highly expressed fusion partner results in high level expression of the target protein. [0128] A "GPR35 fusion protein" refers to a protein or peptide located either on the C- or N- terminal of the target protein GPR35. Examples are GFP-GPR35 fusion protein that the green fluorescent protein (GFP) is located on the N-terminal of GPR35, while GPR35-GFP fusion protein that GFP is located on the C-terminal of GPR35. The tagged protein or peptide can also be located within the intracellular loops of the receptor.
46. GPR35 modulator
[0129] A GPR35 -specific moldulator or GPR35 modulator or the like term is any modulator which direct binds to GPR35 and thus modulates the activity of GPR35. A typical GPR35 -specific modulator can modulate GPR35 activity in one of three cellular assays: (1) Ca2+ mobilization assays in an engineered cell such as HEK-GPR35 with and without co- expressing Gq05. Gq05 is a G protein whose activation results in Ca2+ mobilization, and the Gq05 protein can be activated by the agonist-induced activation of a non-Gq-coupled receptor when expressed in the cell. Since GPR35 is believed to be a non-Gq-coupled receptor, the co- expression of Gq05 is necessary to detect the GPR35 agonist induced Ca2+ mobilization signal. (2) Receptor internalization assays. Receptor internalization is quick universal to almost all GPCRs. (3) Label- free dynamic mass redistribution (DMR) assays, as promised by optical biosensors such as resonant waveguide grating biosensor. The GPR35 modulator can be an agonist, an antagonist, an inverse agonist, and a biased agonism. Alternative assays such as beta-arrestin translocation assays or gene reporter assays can also be used.
47. GPR35 expressing cell
[0130] A GPR35 expressing cell is any cell which produces a functional GPR35 in the cell membrane of the cell.
48. GPR35 agonist
[0131] A GPR35 agonist is any molecule which binds to and thus activates the GPR35 receptor in the cells. Examples, as disclosed herein and/or in published liatetures, include, but are not limited to, dif unisal, flufenamic acid, flunxin, furosemdie, niflumic acid, NPPB, tolfenamic acid, zaprinast, YE210, or DNQX.
49. GPR35 antagonist
[0132] A GPR35 antagonist is any molecule that binds but thus inhibits the activity of GPR35 receptor. Examples include, but not limited to, CID2745687 (methyl-5-[(tert- butylcarbamothioylhydrazinylidene)methyl]-l-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-pyrazole-4-carboxylate). 50. Higher and inhibit and like words
[0133] The terms higher, increases, elevates, or elevation or like terms or variants of these terms, refer to increases above basal levels, e.g., as compared a control. The terms low, lower, reduces, decreases or reduction or like terms or variation of these terms, refer to decreases below basal levels, e.g., as compared to a control. For example, basal levels are normal in vivo levels prior to, or in the absence of, or addition of a molecule such as an agonist or antagonist to a cell. Inhibit or forms of inhibit or like terms refers to reducing or suppressing.
51. Higher, increase, elevate, elevation
[0134] The terms "higher", "increases", "elevates", or "elevation", or like terms or variants of these terms, refer to increases above basal levels, e.g., as compared a control. The terms "low", "lower", "reduces", "decreases" "inhibit", or "reduction", or variation of these terms, refer to decreases below basal levels, e.g., as compared to a control. For example, basal levels are normal in vivo levels prior to, or in the absence of, or addition of an agent such as an agonist or antagonist to activity. For example, decreases or increases can be used to describe the binding of a molecule to a receptor. In this context, decreases would describe a situation of where the binding could be defined as having a IQ of 10~9 M, if this interaction decreased, meaning the binding lessened, the Ka could decrease to 10~6 M. It is understood that wherever one of these words is used it is also disclosed that it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100%, 500%, or 1000% increased or decreased from a control.
[0135] It is understood that this is typically in relation to some standard or expected value, in other words it is relative, but that it is not always necessary for the standard or relative value to be referred to. For example, "inhibits phosphorylation" means hindering or restraining the amount of phosphorylation that takes place relative to a standard or a control.
52. In the presence of the molecule
[0136] "in the presence of the molecule" or like terms refers to the contact or exposure of the cultured cell with the molecule. The contact or exposure can be taken place before, or at the time, the stimulus is brought to contact with the cell.
53. Index
[0137] An index or like terms is a collection of data. For example, an index can be a list, table, file, or catalog that contains one or more modulation profiles. It is understood that an index can be produced from any combination of data. For example, a DMR profile can have a P-DMR, a N-DMR, and a RP-DMR. An index can be produced using the completed date of the profile, the P-DMR data, the N-DMR data, the RP-DMR data, or any point within these, or in combination of these or other data. The index is the collection of any such information. Typically, when comparing indexes, the indexes are of like data, i.e. P-DMR to P-DMR data.
54. Interact
[0138] "Interacts", "interaction", or the like, means that two (or more) molecules touch one another in a way beyond the touching that takes place because of random contacts between molecules. "Interacts" can be thought of as "binding" between two or more molecules, and therefore can have dissociation and association constants as well as equilibrium constants.
55. inflammation
[0139] Inflammation is any specific or non-specific immune response. Inflammation is part of the complex biological response of vascular tissues to harmful stimuli, such as pathogens, damaged cells, or irritants. Inflammation is a protective attempt by the organism to remove the injurious stimuli and to initiate the healing process. Inflammation can be classified as either acute or chronic. Acute inflammation is the initial response of the body to harmful stimuli and is achieved by the increased movement of plasma and leukocytes (especially granulocytes) from the blood into the injured tissues. A cascade of biochemical events propagates and matures the inflammatory response, involving the local vascular system, the immune system, and various cells within the injured tissue. Prolonged
inflammation, known as chronic inflammation, leads to a progressive shift in the type of cells present at the site of inflammation and is characterized by simultaneous destruction and healing of the tissue from the inflammatory process.
56. Known molecule
[0140] A known molecule or like terms is a molecule with known
pharmacological/bio logical/physio logical/pathophysio logical activity whose precise mode of action(s) may be known or unknown.
57. Known modulator
[0141] A known modulator or like terms is a modulator where at least one of the targets is known with a known affinity. For example, a known modulator could be a GPR35 agonist, a GPR35 antagonist, etc. 58. Known modulator biosensor index
[0142] A "known modulator biosensor index" or like terms is a modulator biosensor index produced by data collected for a known modulator. For example, a known modulator biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the known modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the known modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
59. Known modulator DMR index
[0143] A "known modulator DMR index" or like terms is a modulator DMR index produced by data collected for a known modulator. For example, a known modulator DMR index can be made up of a profile of the known modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the known modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
60. Known GPR35 agonist
[0144] A known GPR35 agonist is any GPR35 agonist that at the time it is used in an assay was known to be a GPR35 agonist, as shown in any way.
61. Known GPR35 antagonist
[0145] A known GPR35 antagonist is any GPR35 antagonist that at the time it is used in an assay was known to be a GPR35 antagonist, as shown in any way. To date, there is a few of GPR35 antagonist reported in literature including CID2745687.
62. Metabolic disorder
[0146] A metabolic disorder is a disorder of metabolism, such as diabetes, Type I diabetes, Type II diabetes, inadequate glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, aging, Syndrome X, atherosclerosis, heart disease, stroke, hypertension and peripheral vascular disease.
63. Label-free biosensor cellular assay
[0147] A label free biosensor cellular assay or like terms is any assay that uses a label free biosensor to detect or monitor a cellular response.
64. Label
[0148] The terms label and tag as used herein refer to its presence as a moiety covalently or non-covalently bound to another residue such as the GPR35-hERG complex, wherein the the label enables the location and or activity of the other residue to be monitored. In one example, the label can be fluorescent.
65. Ligand
[0149] A ligand or like terms is a substance or a composition or a molecule that is able to bind to and form a complex with a biomolecule to serve a biological purpose. Actual irreversible covalent binding between a ligand and its target molecule is rare in biological systems. Ligand binding to receptors alters the chemical conformation, i.e., the three dimensional shape of the receptor protein. The conformational state of a receptor protein determines the functional state of the receptor. The tendency or strength of binding is called affinity. Ligands include substrates, blockers, inhibitors, activators, and neurotransmitters. Radioligands are radioisotope labeled ligands, while fluorescent ligands are fluorescent ly tagged ligands; both can be considered as ligands are often used as tracers for receptor biology and biochemistry studies. Ligand and modulator are used interchangeably.
66. Library
[0150] A library or like terms is a collection. The library can be a collection of anything disclosed herein. For example, it can be a collection, of indexes, an index library; it can be a collection of profiles, a profile library; or it can be a collection of DMR indexes, a DMR index library; Also, it can be a collection of molecule, a molecule library; it can be a collection of cells, a cell library; it can be a collection of markers, a marker library; A library can be for example, random or non-random, determined or undetermined. For example, disclosed are libraries of DMR indexes or biosensor indexes of known modulators.
67. Maintaining
[0151] The word "maintaining" or like words refers to continuing a state. In the context of a treatment, maintaining can be refer to less than 20%, 15%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%), 3%), 2%), 1%), or 0.1%) change from a control, such a basal level, often a level in the absence of a treatment or in the presence of treatment with a placebo or standard.
68. Material
[0152] Material is the tangible part of something (chemical, biochemical, biological, or mixed) that goes into the makeup of a physical object.
69. Marker
[0153] A marker or like terms is a ligand which produces a signal in a biosensor cellular assay. The signal is, must also be, characteristic of at least one specific cell signaling pathway(s) and/or at least one specific cellular process(es) mediated through at least one specific target(s). The signal can be positive, or negative, or any combinations (e.g., oscillation).
70. Marker panel
[0154] A "marker panel" or like terms is a panel which comprises at least two markers. The markers can be for different pathways, the same pathway, different targets, or even the same targets.
71. Marker biosensor index
[0155] A "marker biosensor index" or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a marker. For example, a marker biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the marker acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the marker against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
72. Marker DMR index
[0156] A "marker biosensor index" or like terms is a biosensor DMR index produced by data collected for a marker. For example, a marker DMR index can be made up of a profile of the marker acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the marker against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
73. Mimic
[0157] As used herein, "mimic" or like terms refers to performing one or more of the functions of a reference object. For example, a molecule mimic performs one or more of the functions of a molecule.
74. Modulate
[0158] To modulate, or forms thereof, means either increasing, decreasing, or maintaining a cellular activity mediated through a cellular target. It is understood that wherever one of these words is used it is also disclosed that it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%, 100%, 500%, or 1000% increased from a control, or it could be 1%, 5%, 10%, 20%, 50%), or 100%) decreased from a control.
75. Modulator
[0159] A modulator or like terms is a ligand that controls the activity of a cellular target. It is a signal modulating molecule binding to a cellular target, such as a target protein. 76. Modulation comparison
[0160] A "modulation comparison" or like terms is a result of normalizing a primary profile and a secondary profile.
77. Modulator biosensor index
[0161] A "modulator biosensor index" or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a modulator. For example, a modulator biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
78. Modulator DMR index
[0162] A "modulator DMR index" or like terms is a DMR index produced by data collected for a modulator. For example, a modulator DMR index can be made up of a profile of the modulator acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the modulator against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
79. Modulate the biosensor signal of a marker
[0163] "Modulate the biosensor signal or like terms is to cause changes of the biosensor signal or profile of a cell in response to stimulation with a marker.
80. Modulate the DMR signal
[0164] "Modulate the DMR signal or like terms is to cause changes of the DMR signal or profile of a cell in response to stimulation with a marker.
81. Molecule
[0165] As used herein, the term "molecule" or like terms refers to a biological or biochemical or chemical entity that exists in the form of a chemical molecule or molecule with a definite molecular weight. A molecule or like terms is a chemical, biochemical or biological molecule, regardless of its size.
[0166] Many molecules are of the type referred to as organic molecules (molecules containing carbon atoms, among others, connected by covalent bonds), although some molecules do not contain carbon (including simple molecular gases such as molecular oxygen and more complex molecules such as some sulfur-based polymers). The general term
"molecule" includes numerous descriptive classes or groups of molecules, such as proteins, nucleic acids, carbohydrates, steroids, organic pharmaceuticals, small molecule, receptors, antibodies, and lipids. When appropriate, one or more of these more descriptive terms (many of which, such as "protein," themselves describe overlapping groups of molecules) will be used herein because of application of the method to a subgroup of molecules, without detracting from the intent to have such molecules be representative of both the general class "molecules" and the named subclass, such as proteins. Unless specifically indicated, the word "molecule" would include the specific molecule and salts thereof, such as
pharmaceutically acceptable salts.
82. Molecule mixture
[0167] A molecule mixture or like terms is a mixture containing at least two molecules. The two molecules can be, but not limited to, structurally different (i.e., enantiomers), or compositionally different (e.g., protein isoforms, glycoform, or an antibody with different poly(ethylene glycol) (PEG) modifications), or structurally and compositionally different (e.g., unpurified natural extracts, or unpurified synthetic compounds).
83. Molecule biosensor index
[0168] A "molecule biosensor index" or like terms is a biosensor index produced by data collected for a molecule. For example, a molecule biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the molecule acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the molecule against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
84. Molecule DMR index
[0169] A "molecule DMR index" or like terms is a DMR index produced by data collected for a molecule. For example, a molecule biosensor index can be made up of a profile of the molecule acting on the panel of cells, and the modulation profile of the molecule against the panels of markers, each panel of markers for a cell in the panel of cells.
85. Molecule index
[0170] A "molecule index" or like terms is an index related to the molecule.
86. Molecule-treated cell
[0171] A molecule-treated cell or like terms is a cell that has been exposed to a molecule.
87. Molecule modulation index
[0172] A "molecule modulation index" or like terms is an index to display the ability of the molecule to modulate the biosensor output signals of the panels of markers acting on the panel of cells. The modulation index is generated by normalizing a specific biosensor output signal parameter of a response of a cell upon stimulation with a marker in the presence of a molecule against that in the absence of any molecule. 88. Molecule pharmacology
[0173] Molecule pharmacology or the like terms refers to the systems cell biology or systems cell pharmacology or mode(s) of action of a molecule acting on a cell. The molecule pharmacology is often characterized by, but not limited, toxicity, ability to influence specific cellular process(es) (e.g., proliferation, differentiation, reactive oxygen species signaling), or ability to modulate a specific cellular target.
89. Normal individual therapeutic dose
[0174] In certain compositions, more than one active therapeutic agent is present. This is called a combination composition. Thus, within a combination composition, a normal individual therapeutic dose is the dosage that one of the active therapeutic agents is administered at as a single active therapeutic agent.
90. Normalizing
[0175] Normalizing or like terms means, adjusting data, or a profile, or a response, for example, to remove at least one common variable. For example, if two responses are generated, one for a marker acting a cell and one for a marker and molecule acting on the cell, normalizing would refer to the action of comparing the marker- induced response in the absence of the molecule and the response in the presence of the molecule, and removing the response due to the marker only, such that the normalized response would represent the response due to the modulation of the molecule against the marker. A modulation comparison is produced by normalizing a primary profile of the marker and a secondary profile of the marker in the presence of a molecule (modulation profile).
91. Optional
[0176] "Optional" or "optionally" means that the subsequently described event or circumstance may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where said event or circumstance occurs and instances where it does not.
92. Or
[0177] The word "or" or like terms as used herein means any one member of a particular list and also includes any combination of members of that list.
93. Pathophysiologically related to GPR35
[0178] Something is "pathophysiologically related to GPR35" if GPR35 is involved in the functional changes in a body associated with or resulting from disease or injury. 94. Pharmaceutically acceptable
[0179] By "pharmaceutically acceptable", it is meant a material that is not biologically or otherwise undesirable, i.e., the material can be administered to a subject without causing any undesirable biological effects or interacting in a deleterious manner with any of the other components of the pharmaceutical composition in which it is contained. A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can be selected to minimize any degradation of the active ingredient and to minimize any adverse side effects in the subject, as would be well known to one of skill in the art. The carrier can be a solid, a liquid, or both, and can be formulated with the compound as a unit-dose composition, for example, a tablet, which can contain, for example, from 0.05% to 100%, from 0.05% to 99%, from 0.05% to 98%, from 0.05% to 97%, from 0.05% to 96%, from 0.05% to 95%, from 0.05% to 94%, from 0.05% to 93%, from 0.05% to 92%, from 0.05% to 91%, from 0.05% to 90%, from 0.05% to 85%, from 0.05% to 80%, from 0.05% to 75%, from 0.05% to 70%, from 0.05% to 65%, from 0.05% to 60%, from 0.05% to 55%, from 0.05% to 50%, from 0.05% to 45%, from 0.05% to 40%, from 0.05% to 35%, from 0.05% to 30%, from 0.05% to 25%, from 0.05% to 20%, from 0.05% to 15%, from 0.05% to 10%, from 0.05% to 5%, from 0.05% to 4%, from 0.05% to 3%, from 0.05% to 2%, from 0.05% to 1%, from 0.05% to 0.8%, from 0.05% to 0.6%, from 0.05% to 0.5%, from 0.05% to 0.4%, from 0.05% to 0.3%, from 0.05% to 0.2%, from 0.05% to 0.1%, from 0.1% to 100%, from 0.2% to 100%, from 0.3% to 100%, from 0.4% to 100%, from 0.5% to 100%, from 0.6% to 100%, from 0.8% to 100%, from 1% to 100%, from 2% to 100%, from 3% to 100%, from 4% to 100%, from 5% to 100%, from 10% to 100%, from 15% to 100%, from 20% to 100%, from 25% to 100%, from 30% to 100%, from 35% to 100%, from 40% to 100%, from 45% to 100%, from 50% to 100%, from 55% to 100%, from 60% to 100%, from 65% to 100%, from 70% to 100%, from 75% to 100%, from 80% to 100%, from 85% to 100%, from 90% to 100%, 100%, 99%, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 94%, 93%, 92%, 91%, 90%, 89%, 88%, 87%, 86%, 85%, 84%, 83%, 82%, 81%, 80%, 79%, 78%, 77%, 76%, 75%, 74%, 73%, 72%, 71%, 70%, 69%, 68%, 67%, 66%, 65%, 64%, 63%, 62%, 61%, 60%, 59%, 58%, 57%, 56%, 55%, 54%, 53%, 52%, 51%, 50%, 49%, 48%, 47%, 46%, 45%, 44%, 43%, 42%, 41%, 40%, 39%, 38%, 37%, 36%, 35%, 34%, 33%, 32%, 31%, 30%, 29%, 28%, 27%, 26%, 25%, 24%, 23%, 22%, 21%, 20%, 19%, 18%, 17%, 16%, 15%, 14%, 13%, 12%, 11%, 10%, 9%, 8%, 7%, 6%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.6%, 0.5%, 0.4%, 0.3%, 0.2%, 0.1%, 0.05% by weight of the active compounds. A disclosed compound can be coupled with suitable polymers as targetable drug carriers. Other pharmacologically active substances can also be present.
95. Profile
[0180] A profile or like terms refers to the data which is collected for a composition, such as a cell. A profile can be collected from a label free biosensor as described herein.
i. Primary profile
[0181] A "primary profile" or like terms refers to a biosensor response or biosensor output signal or profile which is produced when a molecule contacts a cell. Typically, the primary profile is obtained after normalization of initial cellular response to the net-zero biosensor signal (i.e., baseline)
ii. Secondary profile
[0182] A "secondary profile" or like terms is a biosensor response or biosensor output signal of cells in response to a marker in the presence of a molecule. A secondary profile can be used as an indicator of the ability of the molecule to modulate the marker-induced cellular response or biosensor response.
iii. Modulation profile
[0183] A "modulation profile" or like terms is the comparison between a secondary profile of the marker in the presence of a molecule and the primary profile of the marker in the absence of any molecule. The comparison can be by, for example, subtracting the primary profile from secondary profile or subtracting the secondary profile from the primary profile or normalizing the secondary profile against the primary profile.
96. Panel
[0184] A panel or like terms is a predetermined set of specimens (e.g., markers, or cells, or pathways). A panel can be produced from picking specimens from a library.
97. Positive control
[0185] A "positive control" or like terms is a control that shows that the conditions for data collection can lead to data collection.
98. Potentiate
[0186] Potentiate, potentiated or like terms refers to an increase of a specific parameter of a biosensor response of a marker in a cell caused by a molecule. By comparing the primary profile of a marker with the secondary profile of the same marker in the same cell in the presence of a molecule, one can calculate the modulation of the marker-induced biosensor response of the cells by the molecule. A positive modulation means the molecule to cause increase in the biosensor signal induced by the marker.
99. Potency
[0187] Potency or like terms is a measure of molecule activity expressed in terms of the amount required to produce an effect of given intensity. For example, a highly potent drug evokes a larger response at low concentrations. The potency is proportional to affinity and efficacy. Affinity is the ability of the drug molecule to bind to a receptor.
100. Prodrug
[0188] "Prodrug" or the like terms refers to compounds that when metabolized in vivo, undergo conversion to compounds having the desired pharmacological activity. Prodrugs can be prepared by replacing appropriate functionalities present in pharmacologically active compounds with "pro-moieties" as described, for example, in H. Bundgaar, Design of Prodrugs (1985). Examples of prodrugs include ester, ether or amide derivatives of the compounds herein, and their pharmaceutically acceptable salts. For further discussions of prodrugs, see e.g., T. Higuchi and V. Stella "Pro-drugs as Novel Delivery Systems," ACS Symposium Series 14 (1975) and E. B. Roche ed., Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design (1987).
101. Publications
[0189] Throughout this application, various publications are referenced. The disclosures of these publications in their entireties are hereby incorporated by reference into this application in order to more fully describe the state of the art to which this pertains. The references disclosed are also individually and specifically incorporated by reference herein for the material contained in them that is discussed in the sentence in which the reference is relied upon.
102. Regulatable promoter
[0190] The term "promoter" or like terms is used to designate a region in the genome sequence upstream of a gene transcription start site (TSS), although sequences downstream of TSS may also affect transcription initiation. Promoter elements select the transcription initiation point, transcription specificity and rate. Depending on the distance from the TSS, the terms of 'proximal promoter' (several hundreds nucleotides around the TSS) and 'distal promoter' (thousands and more nucleotides upstream of the TSS) are also used. Both proximal and distal promoters include sets of various elements participating in the complex process of cell-, issue-, organ-, developmental stage- and environmental factors-specific regulation of transcription. Most promoter elements regulating TSS selection are localized in the proximal promoter (PlantProm: a database of plant promoter sequences, Shahmuradov et al. (2003) Nucleic Acids Res.31(1): 114-117).
[0191] A regulatable promoter is a promoter which can be regulated by another molecule. For instance, the presence or absence of a molecule can either initiate promoter activity or prevent promoter activity.
103. Ranges
[0192] Ranges can be expressed herein as from "about" one particular value, and/or to "about" another particular value. When such a range is expressed, some forms includes from the one particular value and/or to the other particular value. Similarly, when values are expressed as approximations, by use of the antecedent "about," it will be understood that the particular value constitutes one of the encompassed values. It will be further understood that the endpoints of each of the ranges are significant both in relation to the other endpoint, and independently of the other endpoint. It is also understood that there are a number of values disclosed herein, and that each value is also herein disclosed as "about" that particular value in addition to the value itself. For example, if the value "10" is disclosed, then "about 10" is also disclosed. It is also understood that when a value is disclosed that "less than or equal to" the value, "greater than or equal to the value" and possible ranges between values are also disclosed, as appropriately understood by the skilled artisan. For example, if the value "10" is disclosed the "less than or equal to 10" as well as "greater than or equal to 10" is also disclosed. It is also understood that the throughout the application, data are provided in a number of different formats, and that these data represent endpoints and starting points, and ranges for any combination of the data points. For example, if a particular datum point " 10" and a particular datum point "15" are disclosed, it is understood that greater than, greater than or equal to, less than, less than or equal to, and equal to 10 and 15 are considered disclosed as well as between 10 and 15. It is also understood that each unit between two particular units are also disclosed. For example, if 10 and 15 are disclosed, then 11, 12, 13, and 14 are also disclosed.
104. Receptor
[0193] A receptor or like terms is a protein molecule embedded in either the plasma membrane or cytoplasm of a cell, to which a mobile signaling (or "signal") molecule may attach. A molecule which binds to a receptor is called a "ligand," and may be a peptide (such as a neurotransmitter), a hormone, a pharmaceutical drug, or a toxin, and when such binding occurs, the receptor goes into a conformational change which ordinarily initiates a cellular response. However, some ligands merely block receptors without inducing any response (e.g. antagonists). Ligand-induced changes in receptors result in physiological changes which constitute the biological activity of the ligands.
105. Reduce
[0194] By "reduce" or other forms of reduce means lowering of an event or
characteristic. It is understood that this is typically in relation to some standard or expected value, in other words it is relative, but that it is not always necessary for the standard or relative value to be referred to. For example, "reduces phosphorylation" means lowering the amount of phosphorylation that takes place relative to a standard or a control.
106. Reducing the risk of
[0195] "Reducing the risk of refers to lowering the chance of an event or characteristic to happen. For example, reducing the risk of disease means lowering the chance that disease will occur, for example, in a subject.
107. "Robust biosensor signal"
[0196] A "robust biosensor signal" is a biosensor signal whose amplitude(s) is significantly (such as 3x, lOx, 20x, lOOx, or lOOOx) above either the noise level, or the negative control response. The negative control response is often the biosensor response of cells after addition of the assay buffer solution (i.e., the vehicle). The noise level is the biosensor signal of cells without further addition of any solution. It is worthy of noting that the cells are always covered with a solution before addition of any solution.
108. "Robust DMR signal"
[0197] A "robust DMR signal" or like terms is a DMR form of a "robust biosensor signal."
109. Response
[0198] A response or like terms is any reaction to any stimulation.
110. Selectable marker
[0199] A selectable marker is a molecule used to select the exogenous gene-positive cells during clone selection of a transfection process. The selectable marker can be, but is not limited to, tetracycline, ampicillin, neomycin, G418 or gentamicin. 111. Sample
[0200] By sample or like terms is meant an animal, a plant, a fungus, etc.; a natural product, a natural product extract, etc.; a tissue or organ from an animal; a cell (either within a subject, taken directly from a subject, or a cell maintained in culture or from a cultured cell line); a cell lysate (or lysate fraction) or cell extract; or a solution containing one or more molecules derived from a cell or cellular material (e.g. a polypeptide or nucleic acid), which is assayed as described herein. A sample may also be any body fluid or excretion (for example, but not limited to, blood, urine, stool, saliva, tears, bile) that contains cells or cell components.
112. Salt(s) and pharmaceutically acceptable salt(s)
[0201] The compounds disclosed herein may be used in the form of salts derived from inorganic or organic acids. Depending on the particular compound, a salt of the compound may be advantageous due to one or more of the salt's physical properties, such as enhanced pharmaceutical stability in differing temperatures and humidities, or a desirable solubility in water or oil. In some instances, a salt of a compound also may be used as an aid in the isolation, purification, and/or resolution of the compound.
[0202] Where a salt is intended to be administered to a patient (as opposed to, for example, being used in an in vitro context), the salt is pharmaceutically acceptable. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to a salt prepared by combining a compound of Formula I or II with an acid whose anion, or a base whose cation, is generally considered suitable for human consumption. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts are particularly useful because of their greater aqueous solubility relative to the parent compound. For use in medicine, salts of the compounds disclosed herein are non-toxic "pharmaceutically acceptable salts." Salts encompassed within the term "pharmaceutically acceptable salts" refer to non-toxic salts of the compounds disclosed herein which are generally prepared by reacting the free base with a suitable organic or inorganic acid.
[0203] Suitable pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of the compounds disclosed herein when possible include those derived from inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, hydrofluoric, boric, fluoroboric, phosphoric, metaphosphoric, nitric, carbonic, sulfonic, and sulfuric acids, and organic acids such as acetic,
benzenesulfonic, benzoic, citric, ethanesulfonic, fumaric, gluconic, glycolic, isothionic, lactic, lactobionic, maleic, malic, methanesulfonic, trifluoromethanesulfonic, succinic, toluenesulfonic, tartaric, and trifluoro acetic acids. Suitable organic acids generally include, for example, aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, aromatic, araliphatic, heterocyclic, carboxylic, and sulfonic classes of organic acids.
[0204] Specific examples of suitable organic acids include acetate, trifluoro acetate, formate, propionate, succinate, glycolate, gluconate, digluconate, lactate, malate, tartaric acid, citrate, ascorbate, glucuronate, maleate, fumarate, pyruvate, aspartate, glutamate, benzoate, anthranilic acid, mesylate, stearate, salicylate, p-hydroxybenzoate, phenylacetate, mandelate, embonate (pamoate), methanesulfonate, ethanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, pantothenate, toluenesulfonate, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonate, sufanilate, cyclohexylaminosulfonate, algenic acid, β-hydroxybutyric acid, galactarate, galacturonate, adipate, alginate, butyrate, camphorate, camphorsulfonate, cyclopentanepropionate, dodecylsulfate, glycoheptanoate, glycerophosphate, heptanoate, hexanoate, nicotinate, 2-naphthalesulfonate, oxalate, palmoate, pectinate, 3-phenylpropionate, picrate, pivalate, thiocyanate, tosylate, and undecanoate.
Furthermore, where the compounds disclosed herein carry an acidic moiety, suitable pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof may include alkali metal salts, i.e., sodium or potassium salts; alkaline earth metal salts, e.g., calcium or magnesium salts; and salts formed with suitable organic ligands, e.g., quaternary ammonium salts. In another embodiment, base salts are formed from bases which form non-toxic salts, including aluminum, arginine, benzathine, choline, diethylamine, diolamine, glycine, lysine, meglumine, olamine, tromethamine and zinc salts.
[0205] Organic salts may be made from secondary, tertiary or quaternary amine salts, such as tromethamine, diethylamine, Ν,Ν'-dibenzylethylenediamine, chloroprocaine, choline, diethanolamine, ethylenediamine, meglumine (N-methylglucamine), and procaine. Basic nitrogen-containing groups may be quaternized with agents such as lower alkyl (CrC6) halides (e.g., methyl, ethyl, propyl, and butyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides), dialkyl sulfates (i.e., dimethyl, diethyl, dibuytl, and diamyl sulfates), long chain halides (i.e., decyl, lauryl, myristyl, and stearyl chlorides, bromides, and iodides), arylalkyl halides (i.e., benzyl and phenethyl bromides), and others.
[0206] In one embodiment, hemisalts of acids and bases may also be formed, for example, hemisulphate and hemicalcium salts.
[0207] The compounds disclosed herein and their salts may exist in both unsolvated and solvated forms. 113. Signaling pathway(s)
[0208] A "defined pathway" or like terms is a path of a cell from receiving a signal (e.g., an exogenous ligand) to a cellular response (e.g., increased expression of a cellular target). In some cases, receptor activation caused by ligand binding to a receptor is directly coupled to the cell's response to the ligand. However, for many cell surface receptors, ligand-receptor interactions are not directly linked to the cell's response. The activated receptor must first interact with other proteins inside the cell before the ultimate physiological effect of the ligand on the cell's behavior is produced. Often, the behavior of a chain of several interacting cell proteins is altered following receptor activation. The entire set of cell changes induced by receptor activation is called a signal transduction mechanism or pathway. The signaling pathway can be either relatively simple or quite complicated.
114. Similarity of indexes
[0209] "Similarity of indexes" or like terms is a term to express the similarity between two indexes, or among at least three indices, one for a molecule, based on the patterns of indices, and/or a matrix of scores. The matrix of scores are strongly related to their counterparts, such as the signatures of the primary profiles of different molecules in corresponding cells, and the nature and percentages of the modulation profiles of different molecules against each marker. For example, higher scores are given to more-similar characters, and lower or negative scores for dissimilar characters. Because there are only three types of modulation, positive, negative and neutral, found in the molecule modulation index, the similarity matrices are relatively simple. For example, a simple matrix will assign identical modulation (e.g., a positive modulation) a score of +1 and non-identical modulation a score of-1.
115. Subject
[0210] As used throughout, by a "subject" is meant an individual. Thus, the "subject" can include, for example, domesticated animals, such as cats, dogs, etc., livestock (e.g., cattle, horses, pigs, sheep, goats, etc.), laboratory animals (e.g., mouse, rabbit, rat, guinea pig, etc.) mammals, non-human mammals, primates, non-human primates, rodents, birds, reptiles, amphibians, fish, and any other animal. The subject can be a mammal such as a primate or a human. The subject can also be a non-human. 116. Solvate
[0211] The compounds herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, may exist in a continuum of solid states ranging from fully amorphous to fully crystalline. They may also exist in unsolvated and solvated forms. The term "solvate" describes a molecular complex comprising the compound and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable solvent molecules (e.g., EtOH). The term "hydrate" is a solvate in which the solvent is water.
Pharmaceutically acceptable solvates include those in which the solvent may be isotopically substituted (e.g., D20, d6-acetone, d6-DMSO).
[0212] A currently accepted classification system for solvates and hydrates of organic compounds is one that distinguishes between isolated site, channel, and metal-ion
coordinated solvates and hydrates. See, e.g., K. R. Morris (H. G. Brittain ed.) Polymorphism in Pharmaceutical Solids (1995). Isolated site solvates and hydrates are ones in which the solvent (e.g., water) molecules are isolated from direct contact with each other by intervening molecules of the organic compound. In channel solvates, the solvent molecules lie in lattice channels where they are next to other solvent molecules. In metal-ion coordinated solvates, the solvent molecules are bonded to the metal ion.
[0213] When the solvent or water is tightly bound, the complex will have a well-defined stoichiometry independent of humidity. When, however, the solvent or water is weakly bound, as in channel solvates and in hygroscopic compounds, the water or solvent content will depend on humidity and drying conditions. In such cases, non-stoichiometry will be the norm.
[0214] The compounds herein, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, may also exist as multi- component complexes (other than salts and solvates) in which the compound and at least one other component are present in stoichiometric or non- stoichiomethc amounts. Complexes of this type include clathrates (drug-host inclusion complexes) and co-crystals. The latter are typically defined as crystalline complexes of neutral molecular constituents which are bound together through non-covalent interactions, but could also be a complex of a neutral molecule with a salt. Co-crystals may be prepared by melt crystallization, by recrystallization from solvents, or by physically grinding the components together. See, e.g., O. Almarsson and M. J. Zaworotko, Chem. Commun., 17: 1889-1896 (2004). For a general review of multi-component complexes, see J. K.
Haleblian, J. Pharm. Sci. 64(8): 1269-88 (1975). 117. Stable
[0215] When used with respect to pharmaceutical compositions, the term "stable" or like terms is generally understood in the art as meaning less than a certain amount, usually 10%, loss of the active ingredient under specified storage conditions for a stated period of time. The time required for a composition to be considered stable is relative to the use of each product and is dictated by the commercial practicalities of producing the product, holding it for quality control and inspection, shipping it to a wholesaler or direct to a customer where it is held again in storage before its eventual use. Including a safety factor of a few months time, the minimum product life for pharmaceuticals is usually one year, and can be more than 18 months. As used herein, the term "stable" references these market realities and the ability to store and transport the product at readily attainable environmental conditions such as refrigerated conditions, 2°C to 8°C.
118. Substance
[0216] A substance or like terms is any physical object. A material is a substance.
Molecules, ligands, markers, cells, proteins, and DNA can be considered substances. A machine or an article would be considered to be made of substances, rather than considered a substance themselves.
119. Test molecule
[0217] A test molecule or like terms is a molecule which is used in a method to gain some information about the test molecule. A test molecule can be an unknown or a known molecule.
120. Tissue
[0218] Tissue or like terms refers to a collection of cells. Typically a tissue is obtained from a subject.
121. Treating
[0219] By "treating" or "treatment" is meant the medical management of a patient with the intent to cure, ameliorate, stabilize, or prevent a disease, pathological condition, or disorder. These terms include active treatment, that is, treatment directed specifically toward the improvement of a disease, pathological condition, or disorder, and also includes causal treatment, that is, treatment directed toward removal of the cause of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. These terms can mean that the symptoms of the underlying disease are reduced, and/or that one or more of the underlying cellular, physiological, or biochemical causes or mechanisms causing the symptoms are reduced. It is understood that reduced, as used in this context, means relative to the state of the disease, including the molecular state of the disease, not just the physiological state of the disease. In certain situations a treatment can inadvertently cause harm. In addition, these terms include palliative treatment, that is, treatment designed for the relief of symptoms rather than the curing of the disease, pathological condition, or disorder; preventative treatment, that is, treatment directed to minimizing or partially or completely inhibiting the development of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder; and supportive treatment, that is, treatment employed to supplement another specific therapy directed toward the improvement of the associated disease, pathological condition, or disorder. These terms mean both treatment having a curing or alleviating purpose and treatment having a preventive purpose. The treatment can be made either acutely or chronically. It is understood that treatment can mean a reduction or one or more symptoms or characteristics by at least 10%, 20%, 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, 95%, 99%, 99.9%, 99.99%, 100%, relative to a control. In the context of these terms, preventing refers to the ability of a compound or composition (such as the disclosed compounds and compositions) to prevent a disease identified herein in patients diagnosed as having the disease or who are at risk of developing such disease. In this context, preventing includes the delaying the onset of the disease relative to a control. These terms do not require that the treatment in fact be effective to produce any of the intended results. It is enough that the results are intended.
122. Therapeutic agent
[0220] A therapeutic agent or like term is any molecule or composition in which the molecule or composition is useful in preventing or treating conditions or diseases within the therapeutic field. For example, anti-cancer agents can be any agent that can prevent the formation of cancer cell in a subject, reduce the number of cancer cells in a subject, or eliminate all cancer cells in a subject.
123. Therapeutically effective
[0221] The term "therapeutically effective" means that the amount of the composition used is of sufficient quantity to treat a subject as defined herein.
124. Toxicity
[0222] Toxicity is the degree to which a substance, molecule, is able to damage something, such as a cell, a tissue, an organ, or a whole organism, that has been exposed to the substance or molecule. For example, the liver, or cells in the liver, hepatocytes, can be damaged by certain substances.
125. Toxicity marker
[0223] A toxicity marker is any reagent, molecule, substance etc. that can be used for identifying, diagnosing, prognosing a level of toxicity of a substance, in for example, an organism or cell or tissue or organ.
126. Transactivate
[0224] "Transactivate" refers to the process that the activation of a receptor in a cell can also activate another receptor in the same cell. Such transactivation can be direct (i.e., both receptors form a complex such as dimer or oligomer, such that the activation of the 1st receptor cause a conformational change in the 2nd receptor, thus leading to the activation of the 2nd receptor) or indirect (i.e., the two receptors are not necessarily within a signaling complex; however, the activation of 1st receptor leads to a pathway in which a signaling protein within the pathway activates the 2nd receptor).
127. Trigger
[0225] A trigger or like terms refers to the act of setting off or initiating an event, such as a response.
128. Values
[0226] Specific and preferred values disclosed for components, ingredients, additives, cell types, markers, and like aspects, and ranges thereof, are for illustration only; they do not exclude other defined values or other values within defined ranges. The compositions, apparatus, and methods of the disclosure include those having any value or any combination of the values, specific values, more specific values, and preferred values described herein.
[0227] Thus, the disclosed methods, compositions, articles, and machines, can be combined in a manner to comprise, consist of, or consist essentially of, the various components, steps, molecules, and composition, and the like, discussed herein. They can be used, for example, in methods for characterizing a molecule including a ligand as defined herein; a method of producing an index as defined herein; or a method of drug discovery as defined herein.
129. Unknown molecule
[0228] An unknown molecule or like terms is a molecule with unknown
bio lo gical/pharmaco lo gical/physio lo gical/pathophysio lo gical activity. 130. Weight %
[0229] References in the specification and concluding claims to parts by weight, of a particular element or component in a composition or article, denote the weight relationship between the element or component and any other elements or components in the composition or article for which a part by weight is expressed. Thus, in a compound containing 2 parts by weight of component X and 5 parts by weight component Y, X and Y are present at a weight ratio of 2:5, and are present in such ratio regardless of whether additional components are contained in the compound.
[0230] A weight percent of a component, unless specifically stated to the contrary, is based on the total weight of the formulation or composition in which the component is included.
C. Methods
[0231] Disclosed herein are methods related to modulation of GPR35 activity. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity treats disease in a subject. In some
embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity reduces the risk of disease in a subject. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity reduces the risk of and/or treats disease in a subject. In some embodiments the disease is pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
[0232] In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity reduces GPR35 activity. In some embodiments modulation of GPR35 activity increases GPR35 activity.
[0233] Disclosed herein are methods of reducing the risk of and/or treating disease in a subject, including administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having Formula I:
Figure imgf000052_0001
Formula I
[0234] In some embodiments R1 can be present or absent. In some embodiments when
R1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy. In some embodiments of R1 the substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy can be linked via an amide, ether or ester moiety to another substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy. In some embodiments when R1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl. In some embodiments when R1 is present it can be substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkenyl. In some
embodiments R1 can be -CH2, -CH=CH-, CH2CH(CN)-, -CH2CH(OH)-, -CH2C(0)-, - CH2CH(NH2)- or -CH2C(CH3)(NH2)-. In some embodiments R1 can be absent.
[0235] In some embodiments R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 can each individually be -H, -OH, - NO2, -SO2NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0236] In some embodiments whenR1 is present and at least one, two, three or four of
2 4 5 6 1 2
R , R R R' and R° are not -H. In some embodiments R is present and at least one of R ,
3 4 5 6 1 2 3
R R R' and R° are not -H. In some embodiments R is present and at least two of R , R , R4, R5 and R6 are not -H. In some embodiments R1 is present and at least three of R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are not -H. In some embodiments R1 is present and at least four of R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are not -H. In some embodiments R1 is present R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are not -H.
[0237] In some embodiments R2 can be -H or halide. In some embodiments R2 can be alkyl or -COOH. In some embodiments R3, R4, R5 and R6 can be -H, -OH, halide or substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl. In some embodiments R3, R4, R5 and R6 can be -H or - OH. In some embodiments R3 or R4 can be -SO2NH3. In some embodiments R3 or R4 can be -O-aryl. In some embodiments R3 or R4 can be -OH. In some embodiments R3 and R4 can be -OH. In some embodiments R5 can be -H or -OH. In some embodiments R5 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl.
[0238] In some embodiments R1 is absent and R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are each individually -H, -OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -SO2NH3 or substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl. In some embodiments R1 is absent and R2 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or -COOH. In some embodiments R1 is absent and R5 can be -H or substituted or unsubstituted alkyl.
[0239] In some embodiments R3 and R4 optionally together form a cyclic moiety. In some embodiments R3 and R4 optionally together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl. In some embodiments R3 and R4 optionally together form a substituted heterocyclyl.
[0240] In some embodiments R1 can be present and be substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted C1-C3 alkenyl and R2 R3, R4, R5 and R6 can be -H, OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, wherein at least two of R2 R3, R4, R5 and R6 cannot be -H.
[0241] In some embodiments R1 can be absent and R3 and R4 optionally together form substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl. In some
embodiments R can be absent and R2 R3, R4, R5 and R6 can be -H, OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH- alkyl, wherein at least two of R2 R3, R4, R5 and R6 cannot be -H.
[0242] Disclosed herein are methods of reducing the risk of and/or treating disease in a subject, including administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having Formula II:
Formula II
[0243] In some embodiments R8 can be -H, -OH, -N02, -S02(NH3), halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH. In some embodiments R can be -H, -OH or -COOH. In some embodiments R8 can be -OH. In some embodiments R8 can be -H.
[0244] In some embodiments R7, R9, R10, R11 and R12 can each individually be -H, -OH, -NO2, -SO2NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy.
[0245] In some embodiments R7 can be -H, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In some
embodiments R7 can be -COOH. In some embodiments R7 can be substituted or
unsubstituted aryl. In some embodiments R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl.
[0246] In some embodiments R7 and R8 optionally together can form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl. In some embodiments R7 and R8 optionally together can form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
[0247] In some embodiments R9, R10, R11 and R12 can be -H, -OH or substituted or unsubstituted aryl. In some embodiments R10 and R11 can be -OH when R9 and R12 are -H. In some embodiments R9 R10 and R11 can be -OH when R12 is -H. In some embodiments R9 and R can be -OH when R10 and R12 are -H. In some embodiments R can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
[0248] In some embodiments X can be -C(O)-, -CHR13-, -0-, -S-or -NR14-. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -S- or -NH-. In some embodiments X can be -0-.
[0249] In some embodiments Y can be present or absent. In some embodiments Y can be present and be -C(O)-, -CHR15-, -0-, -S-, or -NR16. In some embodiments Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments Y can be absent.
[0250] In some embodiments X can be -S- or -NH- and Y can be absent. In some embodiments X can be -S- or -NH- and Y can be absent and R7 can be -COOH. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)- and Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -C(O)- and Y can be present and be -C(O)- and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl. In some embodiments X can be -O- and Y can be present and be -C(O)-. In some embodiments X can be -O- and Y can be present and be - C(O)- and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R can be -OH.
[0251] In some embodiments R13 can be -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R13 can be -H.
[0252] In some embodiments R14 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R14 can be -H.
[0253] In some embodiments R15 can be -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R15 can be -H.
[0254] In some embodiments R16 can be -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl. In some embodiments R16 can be -H.
[0255] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure:
Figure imgf000056_0001
[0256] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000056_0002
and R7 and R8 can together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl. [0257] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000057_0001
and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl and R8 can be -OH.
[0258] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000057_0002
and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
[0259] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000057_0003
and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R can be
OH.
[0260] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000057_0004
and R7 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl and R8, R9 and R11 can be -OH.
[0261] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000058_0001
[0262] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure
Figure imgf000058_0002
and R9 can be -OH and R11 can be substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
[0263] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure:
Figure imgf000058_0003
[0264] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure:
Figure imgf000058_0004
and X can be -0-, -S- or -NH- [0265] In some embodiments Formula II can have the structure:
Figure imgf000058_0005
and X can be -S- or -NH- and R11 and R12 can be -OH.
Figure imgf000059_0001

Figure imgf000060_0001
Figure imgf000060_0002
[0267] In some embodiments Formula I or II can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof. In some forms the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be metal chelating forms. In some forms the pharmaceutically acceptable salt can be Cu2+, or Zn2+ chelating forms. In some embodiments the pharmaceutically acceptable salt for compounds having -COOH can be Cu(II) or Zn(II) chelating forms.
[0268] In some embodiments the disease can be pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity. In some embodiments Formula I or II can be in the form of a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof and the disease can be
pathophysiologically related to GPR35 activity. [0269] In some embodiments Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof, can be a GPR35 modulator. In some embodiments the GPR35 modulator can be a GPR35 agonist. In some embodiments the GPR35 modulator can be a GPR35 antagonist.
[0270] In some embodiments the disease can be selected from the group consisting of inflammation, metabolic disorder, congestive heart failure, and cancer. In some
embodiments the disease can be a metabolic disorder. In some embodiments the metabolic disorder can be selected from the group consisting of diabetes, Type I diabetes, Type II diabetes, inadequate glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, hyper lipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, aging, Syndrome X, atherosclerosis, heart disease, stroke, hypertension and peripheral vascular disease. In some embodiments the disease can be cancer. In some embodiments the cancer can be selected from the group consisting of prostate cancer, leukemia, hormone dependent cancers, breast cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, epidermal cancer, liver cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the brain, and cancer of the kidney.
[0271] In some embodiments Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, can be administered by one or more routes selected from a group consisting of rectal, buccal, sublingual, intravenous, subcutaneous, intradermal, transdermal, intraperitoneal, oral, eye drops, parenteral and topical administration. In some embodiments Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, can be administered orally. In some embodiments Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, can be administered
subcutaneously. In some embodiments Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, can be administered rectally. In some embodiments Formula I or II or a
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, can be administered topically.
[0272] In some embodiments the subject can be diagnosed with a disease
pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity. In some embodiments the subject can be in need of a drug for a disease pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity. In some embodiments the subject can be administered a therapeutically effective amount of Formula I or II. In some embodiments the subject is at risk of having a disease pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
[0273] Also disclosed herein are pharmaceutical compositions of Formula I or II. 1. Administration
[0274] The disclosed compounds can be administered by any suitable route, in the form of a pharmaceutical composition adapted to such a route, and in a dose effective for the treatment or prevention intended. The active compounds and compositions, for example, can be administered orally, rectally, parenterally, ocularly, inhalationaly, or topically.
[0275] Oral administration of a solid dose form can be, for example, presented in discrete units, such as hard or soft capsules, pills, cachets, lozenges, or tablets, each containing a predetermined amount of at least one of the disclosed compound or
compositions. In some forms, the oral administration can be in a powder or granule form. In some forms, the oral dose form is sub-lingual, such as, for example, a lozenge. In such solid dosage forms, the compounds of Formula I are ordinarily combined with one or more adjuvants. Such capsules or tablets can contain a controlled-release formulation. In the case of capsules, tablets, and pills, the dosage forms also can comprise buffering agents or can be prepared with enteric coatings.
[0276] In some forms, oral administration can be in a liquid dose form. Liquid dosage forms for oral administration include, for example, pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs containing inert diluents commonly used in the art (e.g., water). Such compositions also can comprise adjuvants, such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, flavoring (e.g., sweetening), and/or perfuming agents.
[0277] In some forms, the disclosed compositions can comprise a parenteral dose form. "Parenteral administration" includes, for example, subcutaneous injections, intravenous injections, intraperitoneally, intramuscular injections, intrasternal injections, and infusion. Injectable preparations (e.g., sterile injectable aqueous or oleaginous suspensions) can be formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing, wetting agents, and/or suspending agents.
[0278] In some forms, the disclosed compositions can include a topical dose form.
"Topical administration" includes, for example, transdermal administration, such as via transdermal patches or iontophoresis devices, intraocular administration, or intranasal or inhalation administration. Compositions for topical administration also include, for example, topical gels, sprays, ointments, and creams. A topical formulation can include a compound which enhances absorption or penetration of the active ingredient through the skin or other affected areas. When the compounds and compositions are administered by a transdermal device, administration will be accomplished using a patch either of the reservoir and porous membrane type or of a solid matrix variety. Typical formulations for this purpose include gels, hydrogels, lotions, solutions, creams, ointments, dusting powders, dressings, foams, films, skin patches, wafers, implants, sponges, fibres, bandages and microemulsions.
Liposomes can also be used. Typical carriers include alcohol, water, mineral oil, liquid petrolatum, white petrolatum, glycerin, polyethylene glycol and propylene glycol. Penetration enhancers can be incorporated - see, for example, J Pharm Sci, 88 (10), 955-958, by Finnin and Morgan (October 1999).
[0279] Formulations suitable for topical administration to the eye include, for example, eye drops wherein the disclosed compound or composition is dissolved or suspended in suitable carrier. A typical formulation suitable for ocular or aural administration can be in the form of drops of a micronised suspension or solution in isotonic, pH-adjusted, sterile saline. Other formulations suitable for ocular and aural administration include ointments, biodegradable (e.g. absorbable gel sponges, collagen) and non-biodegradable (e.g. silicone) implants, wafers, lenses and particulate or vesicular systems, such as niosomes or liposomes. A polymer such as crossed- linked polyacrylic acid, polyvinylalcohol, hyaluronic acid, a cellulosic polymer, for example, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, hydroxyethylcellulose, or methyl cellulose, or a heteropolysaccharide polymer, for example, gelan gum, can be incorporated together with a preservative, such as benzalkonium chloride. Such formulations can also be delivered by iontophoresis.
[0280] For intranasal administration or administration by inhalation, the active disclosed compounds are conveniently delivered in the form of a solution or suspension from a pump spray container that is squeezed or pumped by the patient or as an aerosol spray presentation from a pressurized container or a nebulizer, with the use of a suitable propellant.
Formulations suitable for intranasal administration are typically administered in the form of a dry powder (either alone, as a mixture, for example, in a dry blend with lactose, or as a mixed component particle, for example, mixed with phospholipids, such as phosphatidylcholine) from a dry powder inhaler or as an aerosol spray from a pressurised container, pump, spray, atomiser (an atomiser using electrohydrodynamics to produce a fine mist), or nebuliser, with or without the use of a suitable propellant, such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane or 1,1,1,2,3,3,3- heptaf uoropropane. For intranasal use, the powder can comprise a bioadhesive agent, for example, chitosan or cyclodextrin. [0281] In some forms, the disclosed compositions can comprise a rectal dose form. Such rectal dose form can be in the form of, for example, a suppository. Cocoa butter is a traditional suppository base, but various alternatives can be used as appropriate.
[0282] Other carrier materials and modes of administration known in the pharmaceutical art can also be used. The disclosed pharmaceutical compositions can be prepared by any of the well-known techniques of pharmacy, such as effective formulation and administration procedures. The above considerations in regard to effective formulations and administration procedures are well known in the art and are described in standard textbooks. Formulation of drugs is discussed in, for example, Hoover, John E., Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pennsylvania, 1975; Liberman, et al, Eds., Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms, Marcel Decker, New York, N.Y., 1980; and Kibbe, et al, Eds., Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients (3rd Ed.), American Pharmaceutical Association, Washington, 1999.
[0283] The disclosed compounds of Formula I or II can be used, alone or in combination with other therapeutic agents, in the treatment or reduction of risk of various conditions or disease states. The disclosed compound(s) and composition(s) of Formula I or II and other therapeutic agent(s) can be administered simultaneously (either in the same dosage form or in separate dosage forms) or sequentially. An exemplary therapeutic agent can be, for example, one selected from the group consisting of anti-inflammation agent, anti-metabolic-disorder agent, anti-congestive-heart-failure agent, anti-cancer agent, kynurenic acid, NPPB, zaprinast, lysophosphatidic acid (LP A) and a compound of Formula I or II as presently disclosed. In some embodiments an anti-cancer agent and a compound of Formula I or II can be administered together or in combination.
[0284] The administration of two or more compounds "in combination" means that the two compounds are administered closely enough in time that the presence of one alters the biological effects of the other. The two or more compounds can be administered
simultaneously, concurrently or sequentially. Additionally, simultaneous administration can be carried out by mixing the compounds prior to administration or by administering the compounds at the same point in time but at different anatomic sites or using different routes of administration. The phrases "concurrent administration," "co-administration,"
"simultaneous administration," and "administered simultaneously" mean that the compounds are administered in combination. [0285] The dosage regimen for the compounds and/or compositions containing the compounds can be based on a variety of factors, including the type, age, weight, sex and medical condition of the patient; the severity of the condition; the route of administration; and the activity of the particular compound employed. Thus the dosage regimen can vary widely. Dosage levels of the order from about 0.001 mg to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day are useful in the treatment or prevention of the above-indicated conditions. Other effective dosages regimens of a disclosed compounds (administered in single or divided doses) include but are not limited to: from about 0.01 to about 100 mg/kg/day, from about 0.1 to about 50 mg/kg/day, from about 0.5 to about 30 mg/kg/day, from about 0.01 to about 10 mg/kg/day, and from about 0.1 to about 1.0 mg/kg/day. Dosage unit compositions can contain such amounts or submultiples thereof to make up the daily dose. In many instances, the administration of the compound will be repeated a plurality of times in a day. Multiple doses per day typically can be used to increase the total daily dose, if desired.
[0286] For oral administration, the compositions can be provided in the form of tablets containing 0.01, 0.05, 0.1, 0.5, 1.0, 2.5, 5.0, 10.0, 15.0, 25.0, 50.0, 75.0, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250 and 500 milligrams of the active ingredient for the symptomatic adjustment of the dosage to the patient. A medicament typically contains from about 0.01 mg to about 500 mg of the active ingredient, or from about 1 mg to about 100 mg of active ingredient.
Intravenously, doses can range from about 0.1 to about 10 mg/kg/minute during a constant rate infusion.
[0287] Disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount of a compound disclosed herein or a pharmaceutically accepted salt, solvate, clathrate, or prodrug thereof; and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or vehicle. These compositions can further comprise additional agents. These compositions are useful for modulating the activity of GPR35, thus to improve the prevention and treatment of GPR35 associated human diseases such as metabolic disorders.
[0288] The compounds or compositions described in the methods herein can be administered adjunctively with other active compounds. These compounds include but are not limited to analgesics, anti-inflammatory drugs, antipyretics, antidepressants,
antiepileptics, antihistamines, antimigraine drugs, antimuscarinics, anxioltyics, sedatives, hypnotics, antipsychotics, bronchodilators, anti-asthma drugs, cardiovascular drugs, corticosteroids, dopaminergics, electrolytes, gastro-intestinal drugs, muscle relaxants, nutritional agents, vitamins, parasympathomimetics, stimulants, anorectics and anti- narcoleptics. "Adjunctive administration", as used herein, means the compounds or compositions can be administered in the same dosage form or in separate dosage forms with one or more other active agents.
[0289] Specific examples of compounds that can be adjunctively administered with a compound of Formula I or II as presently disclosed include, but are not limited to, aceclofenac, acetaminophen, adomexetine, almotriptan, alprazolam, amantadine, amcinonide, aminocyclopropane, amitriptyline, amolodipine, amoxapine, amphetamine, aripiprazole, aspirin, atomoxetine, azasetron, azatadine, beclomethasone, benactyzine, benoxaprofen, bermoprofen, betamethasone, bicifadine, bromocriptine, budesonide, buprenorphine, bupropion, buspirone, butorphanol, butriptyline, caffeine, carbamazepine, carbidopa, carisoprodol, celecoxib, chlordiazepoxide, chlorpromazine, choline salicylate, citalopram, clomipramine, clonazepam, clonidine, clonitazene, clorazepate, clotiazepam, cloxazolam, clozapine, codeine, corticosterone, cortisone, cyclobenzaprine, cyproheptadine,
demexiptiline, desipramine, desomorphine, dexamethasone, dexanabinol, dextroamphetamine sulfate, dextromoramide, dextropropoxyphene, dezocine, diazepam, dibenzepin, diclofenac sodium, diflunisal, dihydrocodeine, dihydroergotamine, dihydromorphine, dimetacrine, divalproxex, dizatriptan, dolasetron, donepezil, dothiepin, doxepin, duloxetine, ergotamine, escitalopram, estazolam, ethosuximide, etodolac, femoxetine, fenamates, fenoprofen, fentanyl, fludiazepam, fluoxetine, fluphenazine, flurazepam, flurbiprofen, flutazolam, fluvoxamine, frovatriptan, gabapentin, galantamine, gepirone, ginko bilboa, granisetron, haloperidol, huperzine A, hydrocodone, hydrocortisone, hydromorphone, hydroxyzine, ibuprofen, imipramine, indiplon, indomethacin, indoprofen, iprindole, ipsapirone, ketaserin, ketoprofen, ketorolac, lesopitron, levodopa, lipase, lofepramine, lorazepam, loxapine, maprotiline, mazindol, mefenamic acid, melatonin, melitracen, memantine, meperidine, meprobamate, mesalamine, metapramine, metaxalone, methadone, methadone,
methamphetamine, methocarbamol, methyldopa, methylphenidate, methylsalicylate, methysergid(e), metoclopramide, mianserin, mifepristone, milnacipran, minaprine, mirtazapine, moclobemide, modafinil (an anti-narcoleptic), molindone, morphine, morphine hydrochloride, nabumetone, nadolol, naproxen, naratriptan, nefazodone, neurontin, nomifensine, nortriptyline, olanzapine, olsalazine, ondansetron, opipramol, orphenadrine, oxaflozane, oxaprazin, oxazepam, oxitriptan, oxycodone, oxymorphone, pancrelipase, parecoxib, paroxetine, pemoline, pentazocine, pepsin, perphenazine, phenacetin, phendimetrazine, phenmetrazine, phenylbutazone, phenytoin, phosphatidylserine, pimozide, pirlindole, piroxicam, pizotifen, pizotyline, pramipexole, prednisolone, prednisone, pregabalin, propanolol, propizepine, propoxyphene, protriptyline, quazepam, quinupramine, reboxitine, reserpine, risperidone, ritanserin, rivastigmine, rizatriptan, rofecoxib, ropinirole, rotigotine, salsalate, sertraline, sibutramine, sildenafil, sulfasalazine, sulindac, sumatriptan, tacrine, temazepam, tetrabenozine, thiazides, thioridazine, thiothixene, tiapride, tiasipirone, tizanidine, tofenacin, tolmetin, toloxatone, topiramate, tramadol, trazodone, triazolam, trifluoperazine, trimethobenzamide, trimipramine, tropisetron, valdecoxib, valproic acid, venlafaxine, viloxazine, vitamin E, zimeldine, ziprasidone, zolmitriptan, Zolpidem, zopiclone and isomers, salts, and combinations thereof.
2. Controlled release formulations
[0290] The pharmaceutical compositions described herein can be formulated for controlled release including immediate release, delayed release, extended release, pulsatile release, and combinations thereof.
i. Nano- and microparticles
[0291] For parenteral administration, the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II, and optional one or more additional active agents, can be incorporated into microparticles, nanoparticles, or combinations thereof that provide controlled release of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and/or one or more additional active agents. In embodiments wherein the formulations contains two or more drugs, the drugs can be formulated for the same type of controlled release (e.g., delayed, extended, immediate, or pulsatile) or the drugs can be independently formulated for different types of release (e.g., immediate and delayed, immediate and extended, delayed and extended, delayed and pulsatile, etc.).
[0292] For example, compounds of Formula I or II and/or one or more additional active agents can be incorporated into polymeric microparticles which provide controlled release of the drug(s). Release of the drug(s) is controlled by diffusion of the drug(s) out of the microparticles and/or degradation of the polymeric particles by hydrolysis and/or enzymatic degradation. Suitable polymers include ethylcellulose and other natural or synthetic cellulose derivatives. [0293] Polymers which are slowly soluble and form a gel in an aqueous environment, such as hydroxypropyl methylcellulose or polyethylene oxide may also be suitable as materials for drug containing microparticles. Other polymers include, but are not limited to, polyanhydrides, poly(ester anhydrides), polyhydroxy acids, such as polylactide (PLA), polyglycolide (PGA), poly(lactide-co-glycolide) (PLGA), poly-3-hydroxybutyrate (PHB) and copolymers thereof, poly-4-hydroxybutyrate (P4HB) and copolymers thereof,
polycapro lactone and copolymers thereof, and combinations thereof.
[0294] Alternatively, the drug(s) can be incorporated into microparticles prepared from materials which are insoluble in aqueous solution or slowly soluble in aqueous solution, but are capable of degrading within the GI tract by means including enzymatic degradation, surfactant action of bile acids, and/or mechanical erosion. As used herein, the term "slowly soluble in water" refers to materials that are not dissolved in water within a period of 30 minutes. Examples include fats, fatty substances, waxes, wax-like substances and mixtures thereof. Suitable fats and fatty substances include fatty alcohols (such as lauryl, myristyl stearyl, cetyl or cetostearyl alcohol), fatty acids and derivatives, including but not limited to fatty acid esters, fatty acid glycerides (mono-, di- and tri-glycerides), and hydrogenated fats. Specific examples include, but are not limited to hydrogenated vegetable oil, hydrogenated cottonseed oil, hydrogenated castor oil, hydrogenated oils available under the trade name Sterotex®, stearic acid, cocoa butter, and stearyl alcohol. Suitable waxes and wax-like materials include natural or synthetic waxes, hydrocarbons, and normal waxes. Specific examples of waxes include beeswax, glycowax, castor wax, carnauba wax, paraffins and candelilla wax. As used herein, a wax-like material is defined as any material which is normally solid at room temperature and has a melting point of from about 30 to 300°C.
[0295] In some cases, it may be desirable to alter the rate of water penetration into the microparticles. To this end, rate-controlling (wicking) agents may be formulated along with the fats or waxes listed above. Examples of rate-controlling materials include certain starch derivatives (e.g., waxy maltodextrin and drum dried corn starch), cellulose derivatives (e.g., hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, hydro xypropylcellulose, methylcellulose, and
carboxymethyl-cellulose), alginic acid, lactose and talc. Additionally, a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant (for example, lecithin) may be added to facilitate the degradation of such microparticles. [0296] Proteins which are water insoluble, such as zein, can also be used as materials for the formation of drug containing microparticles. Additionally, proteins, polysaccharides and combinations thereof which are water soluble can be formulated with drug into microparticles and subsequently cross-linked to form an insoluble network. For example, cyclodextrins can be complexed with individual drug molecules and subsequently cross-linked.
[0297] Encapsulation or incorporation of drug into carrier materials to produce drug containing microparticles can be achieved through known pharmaceutical formulation techniques. In the case of formulation in fats, waxes or wax-like materials, the carrier material is typically heated above its melting temperature and the drug is added to form a mixture comprising drug particles suspended in the carrier material, drug dissolved in the carrier material, or a mixture thereof. Microparticles can be subsequently formulated through several methods including, but not limited to, the processes of congealing, extrusion, spray chilling or aqueous dispersion. Wax can be heated above its melting temperature, drug is added, and the molten wax-drug mixture is congealed under constant stirring as the mixture cools. Alternatively, the molten wax-drug mixture can be extruded and spheronized to form pellets or beads. These processes are known in the art.
[0298] For some carrier materials it may be desirable to use a solvent evaporation technique to produce drug containing microparticles. In this case drug and carrier material are co-dissolved in a mutual solvent and microparticles can subsequently be produced by several techniques including, but not limited to, forming an emulsion in water or other appropriate media, spray drying or by evaporating off the solvent from the bulk solution and milling the resulting material.
[0299] In some embodiments, drug in a particulate form is homogeneously dispersed in a water-insoluble or slowly water soluble material. To minimize the size of the drug particles within the composition, the drug powder itself may be milled to generate fine particles prior to formulation. The process of jet milling, known in the pharmaceutical art, can be used for this purpose. In some embodiments drug in a particulate form is homogeneously dispersed in a wax or wax like substance by heating the wax or wax like substance above its melting point and adding the drug particles while stirring the mixture. In this case a pharmaceutically acceptable surfactant may be added to the mixture to facilitate the dispersion of the drug particles. [0300] The particles can also be coated with one or more modified release coatings. Solid esters of fatty acids, which are hydrolyzed by lipases, can be spray coated onto microparticles or drug particles. Zein is an example of a naturally water-insoluble protein. It can be coated onto drug containing microparticles or drug particles by spray coating or by wet granulation techniques. In addition to naturally water-insoluble materials, some substrates of digestive enzymes can be treated with cross-linking procedures, resulting in the formation of non-soluble networks. Many methods of cross-linking proteins, initiated by both chemical and physical means, have been reported. One of the most common methods to obtain cross-linking is the use of chemical cross-linking agents. Examples of chemical cross- linking agents include aldehydes (gluteraldehyde and formaldehyde), epoxy compounds, carbodiimides, and genipin. In addition to these cross-linking agents, oxidized and native sugars have been used to cross-link gelatin. Cross-linking can also be accomplished using enzymatic means; for example, transglutaminase has been approved as a GRAS substance for cross-linking seafood products. Finally, cross-linking can be initiated by physical means such as thermal treatment, UV irradiation and gamma irradiation.
[0301] To produce a coating layer of cross-linked protein surrounding drug containing microparticles or drug particles, a water soluble protein can be spray coated onto the microparticles and subsequently cross-linked by the one of the methods described above. Alternatively, drug containing microparticles can be microencapsulated within protein by coacervation-phase separation (for example, by the addition of salts) and subsequently cross- linked. Some suitable proteins for this purpose include gelatin, albumin, casein, and gluten.
[0302] Polysaccharides can also be cross-linked to form a water-insoluble network. For many polysaccharides, this can be accomplished by reaction with calcium salts or multivalent cations which cross-link the main polymer chains. Pectin, alginate, dextran, amylose and guar gum are subject to cross-linking in the presence of multivalent cations. Complexes between oppositely charged polysaccharides can also be formed; pectin and chitosan, for example, can be complexed via electrostatic interactions.
[0303] In certain embodiments, it may be desirable to provide continuous delivery of one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II to a patient in need thereof. For intravenous or intraarterial routes, this can be accomplished using drip systems, such as by intravenous administration. For topical applications, repeated application can be done or a patch can be used to provide continuous administration of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II over an extended period of time.
ii. Injectable/Implantable Solid Implants
[0304] The pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II described herein can be incorporated into injectable/implantable solid or semi-solid implants, such as polymeric implants. In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II are incorporated into a polymer that is a liquid or paste at room temperature, but upon contact with aqueous medium, such as physiological fluids, exhibits an increase in viscosity to form a semi-solid or solid material. Exemplary polymers include, but are not limited to,
hydro xyalkanoic acid polyesters derived from the copolymerization of at least one unsaturated hydroxy fatty acid copolymerized with hydroxyalkanoic acids. The polymer can be melted, mixed with the active substance and cast or injection molded into a device. Such melt fabrication require polymers having a melting point that is below the temperature at which the substance to be delivered and polymer degrade or become reactive. The device can also be prepared by solvent casting where the polymer is dissolved in a solvent and the drug dissolved or dispersed in the polymer solution and the solvent is then evaporated. Solvent processes require that the polymer be soluble in organic solvents. Another method is compression molding of a mixed powder of the polymer and the drug or polymer particles loaded with the active agent.
[0305] Alternatively, the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II can be incorporated into a polymer matrix and molded, compressed, or extruded into a device that is a solid at room temperature. For example, the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula
I or II can be incorporated into a biodegradable polymer, such as polyanhydrides,
polyhydroalkanoic acids (PHAs), PLA, PGA, PLGA, polycapro lactone, polyesters, polyamides, polyort ho esters, polyphosphazenes, proteins and polysaccharides such as collagen, hyaluronic acid, albumin and gelatin, and combinations thereof and compressed into solid device, such as disks, or extruded into a device, such as rods.
[0306] The release of the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or
II from the implant can be varied by selection of the polymer, the molecular weight of the polymer, and/ir modification of the polymer to increase degradation, such as the formation of pores and/or incorporation of hydro lyzable linkages. Methods for modifying the properties of biodegradable polymers to vary the release profile of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II from the implant are well known in the art.
iii. Enteral Formulations
[0307] Suitable oral dosage forms include tablets, capsules, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and lozenges. Tablets can be made using compression or molding techniques well known in the art. Gelatin or non-gelatin capsules can prepared as hard or soft capsule shells, which can encapsulate liquid, solid, and semi-solid fill materials, using techniques well known in the art.
[0308] Formulations may be prepared using a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier. As generally used herein "carrier" includes, but is not limited to, diluents, preservatives, binders, lubricants, disintegrators, swelling agents, fillers, stabilizers, and combinations thereof.
[0309] Carrier also includes all components of the coating composition which may include plasticizers, pigments, colorants, stabilizing agents, and glidants. Delayed release dosage formulations may be prepared as described in standard references. These references provide information on carriers, materials, equipment and process for preparing tablets and capsules and delayed release dosage forms of tablets, capsules, and granules.
[0310] Examples of suitable coating materials include, but are not limited to, cellulose polymers such as cellulose acetate phthalate, hydro xypropyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose, hydroxypropyl methylcellulose phthalate and hydroxypropyl
methylcellulose acetate succinate; polyvinyl acetate phthalate, acrylic acid polymers and copolymers, and methacrylic resins that are commercially available under the trade name EUDRAGIT® (Roth Pharma, Westerstadt, Germany), zein, shellac, and polysaccharides.
[0311] Additionally, the coating material may contain conventional carriers such as plasticizers, pigments, colorants, glidants, stabilization agents, pore formers and surfactants.
[0312] Optional pharmaceutically acceptable excipients include, but are not limited to, diluents, binders, lubricants, disintegrants, colorants, stabilizers, and surfactants. Diluents, also referred to as "fillers," are typically necessary to increase the bulk of a solid dosage form so that a practical size is provided for compression of tablets or formation of beads and granules. Suitable diluents include, but are not limited to, dicalcium phosphate dihydrate, calcium sulfate, lactose, sucrose, mannitol, sorbitol, cellulose, micro crystalline cellulose, kaolin, sodium chloride, dry starch, hydrolyzed starches, pregelatinized starch, silicone dioxide, titanium oxide, magnesium aluminum silicate and powdered sugar. [0313] Binders are used to impart cohesive qualities to a solid dosage formulation, and thus ensure that a tablet or bead or granule remains intact after the formation of the dosage forms. Suitable binder materials include, but are not limited to, starch, prege latinized starch, gelatin, sugars (including sucrose, glucose, dextrose, lactose and sorbitol), polyethylene glycol, waxes, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, tragacanth, sodium alginate, cellulose, including hydro xypropylmethylcellulose, hydro xypropylcellulose, ethylcellulose, and veegum, and synthetic polymers such as acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate copolymers, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymers, polyacrylic acid/polymethacrylic acid and polyvinylpyrrolidone.
[0314] Lubricants are used to facilitate tablet manufacture. Examples of suitable lubricants include, but are not limited to, magnesium stearate, calcium stearate, stearic acid, glycerol behenate, polyethylene glycol, talc, and mineral oil.
[0315] Disintegrants are used to facilitate dosage form disintegration or "breakup" after administration, and generally include, but are not limited to, starch, sodium starch glycolate, sodium carboxymethyl starch, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, hydroxypropyl cellulose, pregelatinized starch, clays, cellulose, alginine, gums or cross linked polymers, such as cross- linked PVP (Polyplasdone® XL from GAF Chemical Corp).
[0316] Stabilizers are used to inhibit or retard drug decomposition reactions which include, by way of example, oxidative reactions. Suitable stabilizers include, but are not limited to, antioxidants, butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT); ascorbic acid, its salts and esters; Vitamin E, tocopherol and its salts; sulfites such as sodium metabisulphite; cysteine and its derivatives; citric acid; propyl gallate, and butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA).
a. Controlled Release Formulations
[0317] Oral dosage forms, such as capsules, tablets, solutions, and suspensions, can for formulated for controlled release. For example, the one or more pharmaceutical
compositions having Formula I or II and optional one or more additional active agents can be formulated into nanoparticles, microparticles, and combinations thereof, and encapsulated in a soft or hard gelatin or non-gelatin capsule or dispersed in a dispersing medium to form an oral suspension or syrup. The particles can be formed of the drug and a controlled release polymer or matrix. Alternatively, the drug particles can be coated with one or more controlled release coatings prior to incorporation in to the finished dosage form. [0318] In another embodiment, the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and optional one or more additional active agents are dispersed in a matrix material, which gels or emulsifies upon contact with an aqueous medium, such as
physiological fluids. In the case of gels, the matrix swells entrapping the active agents, which are released slowly over time by diffusion and/or degradation of the matrix material. Such matrices can be formulated as tablets or as fill materials for hard and soft capsules.
[0319] In still another embodiment, the one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II, and optional one or more additional active agents are formulated into a sold oral dosage form, such as a tablet or capsule, and the solid dosage form is coated with one or more controlled release coatings, such as a delayed release coatings or extended release coatings. The coating or coatings may also contain the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II and/or additional active agents.
(A) Extended release dosage forms
[0320] The extended release formulations are generally prepared as diffusion or osmotic systems, which are known in the art. A diffusion system typically consists of two types of devices, a reservoir and a matrix, and is well known and described in the art. The matrix devices are generally prepared by compressing the drug with a slowly dissolving polymer carrier into a tablet form. The three major types of materials used in the preparation of matrix devices are insoluble plastics, hydrophilic polymers, and fatty compounds. Plastic matrices include, but are not limited to, methyl acrylate-methyl methacrylate, polyvinyl chloride, and polyethylene. Hydrophilic polymers include, but are not limited to, cellulosic polymers such as methyl and ethyl cellulose, hydro xyalkylcelluloses such as hydro xypropyl-cellulose, hydroxypropylmethylcellulose, sodium carboxymethylcellulose, and Carbopol® 934, polyethylene oxides and mixtures thereof. Fatty compounds include, but are not limited to, various waxes such as carnauba wax and glyceryl tristearate and wax-type substances including hydrogenated castor oil or hydrogenated vegetable oil, or mixtures thereof.
[0321] In certain preferred embodiments, the plastic material is a pharmaceutically acceptable acrylic polymer, including but not limited to, acrylic acid and methacrylic acid copolymers, methyl methacrylate, methyl methacrylate copolymers, ethoxyethyl
methacrylates, cyanoethyl methacrylate, aminoalkyl methacrylate copolymer, poly( acrylic acid), poly(methacrylic acid), methacrylic acid alkylamine copolymer poly(methyl methacrylate), poly(methacrylic acid)(anhydride), polymethacrylate, polyacrylamide, poly(methacrylic acid anhydride), and glycidyl methacrylate copolymers.
[0322] In certain preferred embodiments, the acrylic polymer is comprised of one or more ammonio methacrylate copolymers. Ammonio methacrylate copolymers are well known in the art, and are described in NF XVII as fully polymerized copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic acid esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups.
[0323] In one preferred embodiment, the acrylic polymer is an acrylic resin lacquer such as that which is commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the tradename Eudragit®. In further preferred embodiments, the acrylic polymer comprises a mixture of two acrylic resin lacquers commercially available from Rohm Pharma under the tradenames Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit ® RS30D, respectively. Eudragit® RL30D and Eudragit® RS30D are copolymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters with a low content of quaternary ammonium groups, the molar ratio of ammonium groups to the remaining neutral (meth)acrylic esters being 1 :20 in Eudragit® RL30D and 1 :40 in Eudragit® RS30D. The mean molecular weight is about 150,000. Edragit® S-100 and Eudragit® L-100 are also preferred. The code designations RL (high permeability) and RS (low permeability) refer to the permeability properties of these agents. Eudragit® RL/RS mixtures are insoluble in water and in digestive fluids. However, multiparticulate systems formed to include the same are swellable and permeable in aqueous solutions and digestive fluids.
[0324] The polymers described above such as Eudragit® RL/RS may be mixed together in any desired ratio in order to ultimately obtain a sustained-release formulation having a desirable dissolution profile. Desirable sustained-release multiparticulate systems may be obtained, for instance, from 100% Eudragit® RL, 50% Eudragit® RL and 50% Eudragit® RS, and 10% Eudragit® RL and 90% Eudragit® RS. One skilled in the art will recognize that other acrylic polymers may also be used, such as, for example, Eudragit® L.
[0325] Alternatively, extended release formulations can be prepared using osmotic systems or by applying a semi-permeable coating to the dosage form. In the latter case, the desired drug release profile can be achieved by combining low permeable and high permeable coating materials in suitable proportion.
[0326] The devices with different drug release mechanisms described above can be combined in a final dosage form comprising single or multiple units. Examples of multiple units include, but are not limited to, multilayer tablets and capsules containing tablets, beads, or granules. An immediate release portion can be added to the extended release system by means of either applying an immediate release layer on top of the extended release core using a coating or compression process or in a multiple unit system such as a capsule containing extended and immediate release beads.
[0328] Extended release tablets containing hydrophilic polymers are prepared by techniques commonly known in the art such as direct compression, wet granulation, or dry granulation. Their formulations usually incorporate polymers, diluents, binders, and lubricants as well as the active pharmaceutical ingredient. The usual diluents include inert powdered substances such as starches, powdered cellulose, especially crystalline and microcrystalline cellulose, sugars such as fructose, mannitol and sucrose, grain flours and similar edible powders. Typical diluents include, for example, various types of starch, lactose, mannitol, kaolin, calcium phosphate or sulfate, inorganic salts such as sodium chloride and powdered sugar. Powdered cellulose derivatives are also useful. Typical tablet binders include substances such as starch, gelatin and sugars such as lactose, fructose, and glucose. Natural and synthetic gums, including acacia, alginates, methylcellulose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone can also be used. Polyethylene glycol, hydrophilic polymers, ethylcellulose and waxes can also serve as binders. A lubricant is necessary in a tablet formulation to prevent the tablet and punches from sticking in the die. The lubricant is chosen from such slippery solids as talc, magnesium and calcium stearate, stearic acid and hydrogenated vegetable oils.
[0329] Extended release tablets containing wax materials are generally prepared using methods known in the art such as a direct blend method, a congealing method, and an aqueous dispersion method. In the congealing method, the drug is mixed with a wax material and either spray- congealed or congealed and screened and processed.
(B) Delayed release dosage forms
[0330] Delayed release formulations can be created by coating a solid dosage form with a polymer film, which is insoluble in the acidic environment of the stomach, and soluble in the neutral environment of the small intestine.
[0331] The delayed release dosage units can be prepared, for example, by coating a drug or a drug-containing composition with a selected coating material. The drug-containing composition may be, e.g., a tablet for incorporation into a capsule, a tablet for use as an inner core in a "coated core" dosage form, or a plurality of drug-containing beads, particles or granules, for incorporation into either a tablet or capsule. Preferred coating materials include bioerodible, gradually hydro lyzable, gradually water-soluble, and/or enzymatically degradable polymers, and may be conventional "enteric" polymers. Enteric polymers, as will be appreciated by those skilled in the art, become soluble in the higher pH environment of the lower gastrointestinal tract or slowly erode as the dosage form passes through the
gastrointestinal tract, while enzymatically degradable polymers are degraded by bacterial enzymes present in the lower gastrointestinal tract, particularly in the colon. Suitable coating materials for effecting delayed release include, but are not limited to, cellulosic polymers such as hydroxypropyl cellulose, hydro xyethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydro xypropyl methyl cellulose, hydroxypropyl methyl cellulose acetate succinate, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose phthalate, methylcellulose, ethyl cellulose, cellulose acetate, cellulose acetate phthalate, cellulose acetate trimellitate and carboxymethylcellulose sodium; acrylic acid polymers and copolymers, formed from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, methyl acrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate and/or ethyl methacrylate, and other methacrylic resins that are commercially available under the tradename Eudragit®. (Rohm Pharma;
Westerstadt, Germany), including Eudragit® L30D-55 and LI 00-55 (soluble at pH 5.5 and above), Eudragit® L-100 (soluble at pH 6.0 and above), Eudragit® S (soluble at pH 7.0 and above, as a result of a higher degree of esterification), and Eudragits® NE, RL and RS (water-insoluble polymers having different degrees of permeability and expandability); vinyl polymers and copolymers such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, vinyl acetate, vinylacetate phthalate, vinylacetate crotonic acid copolymer, and ethylene -vinyl acetate copolymer; enzymatically degradable polymers such as azo polymers, pectin, chitosan, amylose and guar gum; zein and shellac. Combinations of different coating materials may also be used. Multi-layer coatings using different polymers may also be applied.
[0332] The preferred coating weights for particular coating materials may be readily determined by those skilled in the art by evaluating individual release profiles for tablets, beads and granules prepared with different quantities of various coating materials. It is the combination of materials, method and form of application that produce the desired release characteristics, which one can determine only from the clinical studies.
[0333] The coating composition may include conventional additives, such as plasticizers, pigments, colorants, stabilizing agents, glidants, etc. A plasticizer is normally present to reduce the fragility of the coating, and will generally represent about 10 wt. % to 50 wt. % relative to the dry weight of the polymer. Examples of typical plasticizers include polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, triacetin, dimethyl phthalate, diethyl phthalate, dibutyl phthalate, dibutyl sebacate, triethyl citrate, tributyl citrate, triethyl acetyl citrate, castor oil and acetylated monoglycerides. A stabilizing agent is used to stabilize particles in the dispersion. Typical stabilizing agents are nonionic emulsifiers such as sorbitan esters, polysorbates and polyvinylpyrrolidone. Glidants are recommended to reduce sticking effects during film formation and drying, and will generally represent approximately 25 wt. % to 100 wt. % of the polymer weight in the coating solution. One effective glidant is talc. Other glidants such as magnesium stearate and glycerol monostearates may also be used. Pigments such as titanium dioxide may also be used. Small quantities of an anti-foaming agent, such as a silicone (e.g., simethicone), may also be added to the coating composition.
iv. Topical Formulations
[0334] Suitable dosage forms for topical administration include creams, ointments, salves, sprays, gels, lotions, emulsions, and transdermal patches. The formulation may be formulated for transmucosal, transepithelial, transendothelial, or transdermal administration. The compounds can also be formulated for intranasal delivery, pulmonary delivery, or inhalation. The compositions may further contain one or more chemical penetration enhancers, membrane permeability agents, membrane transport agents, emollients, surfactants, stabilizers, and combination thereof.
a. Topical Formulations
[0335] "Emollients" are an externally applied agent that softens or soothes skin and are generally known in the art and listed in compendia, such as the "Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients", 4th Ed., Pharmaceutical Press, 2003. These include, without limitation, almond oil, castor oil, ceratonia extract, cetostearoyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cetyl esters wax, cholesterol, cottonseed oil, cyclomethicone, ethylene glycol palmitostearate, glycerin, glycerin monostearate, glyceryl monooleate, isopropyl myristate, isopropyl palmitate, lanolin, lecithin, light mineral oil, medium-chain triglycerides, mineral oil and lanolin alcohols, petrolatum, petrolatum and lanolin alcohols, soybean oil, starch, stearyl alcohol, sunflower oil, xylitol and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the emollients are
ethylhexylstearate and ethylhexyl palmitate.
[0336] "Surfactants" are surface-active agents that lower surface tension and thereby increase the emulsifying, foaming, dispersing, spreading and wetting properties of a product. Suitable non-ionic surfactants include emulsifying wax, glyceryl monooleate, polyoxy ethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, polysorbate, sorbitan esters, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, cyclodextrins, glycerin monostearate, poloxamer, povidone and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the non-ionic surfactant is stearyl alcohol.
[0337] "Emulsifiers" are surface active substances which promote the suspension of one liquid in another and promote the formation of a stable mixture, or emulsion, of oil and water. Common emulsifiers are: metallic soaps, certain animal and vegetable oils, and various polar compounds. Suitable emulsifiers include acacia, anionic emulsifying wax, calcium stearate, carbomers, cetostearyl alcohol, cetyl alcohol, cholesterol, diethanolamine, ethylene glycol palmitostearate, glycerin monostearate, glyceryl monooleate, hydroxpropyl cellulose, hypromellose, lanolin, hydrous, lanolin alcohols, lecithin, medium-chain triglycerides, methylcellulose, mineral oil and lanolin alcohols, monobasic sodium phosphate,
monoethanolamine, nonionic emulsifying wax, oleic acid, poloxamer, poloxamers, polyoxyethylene alkyl ethers, polyoxyethylene castor oil derivatives, polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid esters, polyoxyethylene stearates, propylene glycol alginate, self- emulsifying glyceryl monostearate, sodium citrate dehydrate, sodium lauryl sulfate, sorbitan esters, stearic acid, sunflower oil, tragacanth, triethanolamine, xanthan gum and combinations thereof. In one embodiment, the emulsifier is glycerol stearate.
[0338] Suitable classes of penetration enhancers are known in the art and include, but are not limited to, fatty alcohols, fatty acid esters, fatty acids, fatty alcohol ethers, amino acids, phospholipids, lecithins, cholate salts, enzymes, amines and amides, complexing agents (liposomes, cyclodextrins, modified celluloses, and diimides), macrocyclics, such as macrocylic lactones, ketones, and anhydrides and cyclic ureas, surfactants, N-methyl pyrrolidones and derivatives thereof, DMSO and related compounds, ionic compounds, azone and related compounds, and solvents, such as alcohols, ketones, amides, polyols (e.g., glycols). Examples of these classes are known in the art.
(A) Lotions, creams, gels, ointments, emulsions, and foams
[0339] "Hydrophilic" as used herein refers to substances that have strongly polar groups that readily interact with water.
[0340] "Lipophilic" refers to compounds having an affinity for lipids. [0341] "Amphiphilic" refers to a molecule combining hydrophilic and lipophilic
(hydrophobic) properties
[0342] "Hydrophobic" as used herein refers to substances that lack an affinity for water; tending to repel and not absorb water as well as not dissolve in or mix with water.
[0343] A "gel" is a colloid in which the dispersed phase has combined with the continuous phase to produce a semisolid material, such as jelly.
[0344] An "oil" is a composition containing at least 95% wt of a lipophilic substance. Examples of lipophilic substances include but are not limited to naturally occurring and synthetic oils, fats, fatty acids, lecithins, triglycerides and combinations thereof.
[0345] A "continuous phase" refers to the liquid in which solids are suspended or droplets of another liquid are dispersed, and is sometimes called the external phase. This also refers to the fluid phase of a colloid within which solid or fluid particles are distributed. If the continuous phase is water (or another hydrophilic solvent), water-soluble or hydrophilic drugs will dissolve in the continuous phase (as opposed to being dispersed). In a multiphase formulation (e.g., an emulsion), the discreet phase is suspended or dispersed in the continuous phase.
[0346] An "emulsion" is a composition containing a mixture of non-miscible
components homogenously blended together. In particular embodiments, the non-miscible components include a lipophilic component and an aqueous component. An emulsion is a preparation of one liquid distributed in small globules throughout the body of a second liquid. The dispersed liquid is the discontinuous phase, and the dispersion medium is the continuous phase. When oil is the dispersed liquid and an aqueous solution is the continuous phase, it is known as an oil-in-water emulsion, whereas when water or aqueous solution is the dispersed phase and oil or oleaginous substance is the continuous phase, it is known as a water-in-oil emulsion. Either or both of the oil phase and the aqueous phase may contain one or more surfactants, emulsifiers, emulsion stabilizers, buffers, and other excipients. Preferred excipients include surfactants, especially non-ionic surfactants; emulsifying agents, especially emulsifying waxes; and liquid non-volatile non-aqueous materials, particularly glycols such as propylene glycol. The oil phase may contain other oily pharmaceutically approved excipients. For example, materials such as hydroxylated castor oil or sesame oil may be used in the oil phase as surfactants or emulsifiers. [0347] An emulsion is a preparation of one liquid distributed in small globules throughout the body of a second liquid. The dispersed liquid is the discontinuous phase, and the dispersion medium is the continuous phase. When oil is the dispersed liquid and an aqueous solution is the continuous phase, it is known as an oil-in-water emulsion, whereas when water or aqueous solution is the dispersed phase and oil or oleaginous substance is the continuous phase, it is known as a water-in-oil emulsion. The oil phase may consist at least in part of a propellant, such as an HFA propellant. Either or both of the oil phase and the aqueous phase may contain one or more surfactants, emulsifiers, emulsion stabilizers, buffers, and other excipients. Preferred excipients include surfactants, especially non-ionic surfactants; emulsifying agents, especially emulsifying waxes; and liquid non-volatile nonaqueous materials, particularly glycols such as propylene glycol. The oil phase may contain other oily pharmaceutically approved excipients. For example, materials such as
hydroxylated castor oil or sesame oil may be used in the oil phase as surfactants or emulsifiers.
[0348] A sub-set of emulsions are the self-emulsifying systems. These drug delivery systems are typically capsules (hard shell or soft shell) comprised of the drug dispersed or dissolved in a mixture of surfactant(s) and lipophilic liquids such as oils or other water immiscible liquids. When the capsule is exposed to an aqueous environment and the outer gelatin shell dissolves, contact between the aqueous medium and the capsule contents instantly generates very small emulsion droplets. These typically are in the size range of micelles or nanoparticles. No mixing force is required to generate the emulsion as is typically the case in emulsion formulation processes.
[0349] A "lotion" is a low- to medium-viscosity liquid formulation. A lotion can contain finely powdered substances that are in soluble in the dispersion medium through the use of suspending agents and dispersing agents. Alternatively, lotions can have as the dispersed phase liquid substances that are immiscible wit the vehicle and are usually dispersed by means of emulsifying agents or other suitable stabilizers. In one embodiment, the lotion is in the form of an emulsion having a viscosity of between 100 and 1000 centistokes. The fluidity of lotions permits rapid and uniform application over a wide surface area. Lotions are typically intended to dry on the skin leaving a thin coat of their medicinal components on the skin's surface. [0350] A "cream" is a viscous liquid or semi-solid emulsion of either the "oil-in-water" or "water-in-oil type". Creams may contain emulsifying agents and/or other stabilizing agents. In one embodiment, the formulation is in the form of a cream having a viscosity of greater than 1000 centistokes, typically in the range of 20,000-50,000 centistokes. Creams are often time preferred over ointments as they are generally easier to spread and easier to remove.
[0351] The difference between a cream and a lotion is the viscosity, which is dependent on the amount/use of various oils and the percentage of water used to prepare the
formulations. Creams are typically thicker than lotions, may have various uses and often one uses more varied oils/butters, depending upon the desired effect upon the skin. In a cream formulation, the water-base percentage is about 60-75 % and the oil-base is about 20-30 % of the total, with the other percentages being the emulsifier agent, preservatives and additives for a total of 100 %.
[0352] An "ointment" is a semisolid preparation containing an ointment base and optionally one or more active agents. Examples of suitable ointment bases include hydrocarbon bases (e.g., petrolatum, white petrolatum, yellow ointment, and mineral oil); absorption bases (hydrophilic petrolatum, anhydrous lanolin, lanolin, and cold cream); water- removable bases (e.g., hydrophilic ointment), and water-soluble bases (e.g., polyethylene glycol ointments). Pastes typically differ from ointments in that they contain a larger percentage of solids. Pastes are typically more absorptive and less greasy that ointments prepared with the same components.
[0353] A "gel" is a semisolid system containing dispersions of small or large molecules in a liquid vehicle that is rendered semisolid by the action of a thickening agent or polymeric material dissolved or suspended in the liquid vehicle. The liquid may include a lipophilic component, an aqueous component or both. Some emulsions may be gels or otherwise include a gel component. Some gels, however, are not emulsions because they do not contain a homogenized blend of immiscible components. Suitable gelling agents include, but are not limited to, modified celluloses, such as hydro xypropyl cellulose and hydroxyethyl cellulose; Carbopol homopolymers and copolymers; and combinations thereof. Suitable solvents in the liquid vehicle include, but are not limited to, diglycol monoethyl ether; alklene glycols, such as propylene glycol; dimethyl isosorbide; alcohols, such as isopropyl alcohol and ethanol. The solvents are typically selected for their ability to dissolve the drug. Other additives, which improve the skin feel and/or emolliency of the formulation, may also be incorporated. Examples of such additives include, but are not limited, isopropyl myristate, ethyl acetate, C12-C15 alkyl benzoates, mineral oil, squalane, cyclomethicone, capric/caprylic triglycerides, and combinations thereof.
[0354] Foams consist of an emulsion in combination with a gaseous propellant. The gaseous propellant consists primarily of hydro fluoroalkanes (HFAs). Suitable propellants include HFAs such as 1,1,1,2-tetrafluoroethane (HFA 134a) and 1,1,1,2,3,3,3- heptafluoropropane (HFA 227), but mixtures and admixtures of these and other HFAs that are currently approved or may become approved for medical use are suitable. The propellants are not hydrocarbon propellant gases which can produce flammable or explosive vapors during spraying. Furthermore, the compositions contain no volatile alcohols, which can produce flammable or explosive vapors during use.
[0355] Buffers are used to control pH of a composition. The buffers buffer the composition from a pH of about 4 to a pH of about 7.5, or from a pH of about 4 to a pH of about 7, or from a pH of about 5 to a pH of about 7. In a preferred embodiment, the buffer is triethanolamine.
[0356] Preservatives can be used to prevent the growth of fungi and microorganisms. Suitable antifungal and antimicrobial agents include, but are not limited to, benzoic acid, butylparaben, ethyl paraben, methyl paraben, propylparaben, sodium benzoate, sodium propionate, benzalkonium chloride, benzethonium chloride, benzyl alcohol, cetylpyridinium chloride, chlorobutanol, phenol, phenylethyl alcohol, and thimerosal.
[0357] In certain embodiments, it may be desirable to provide continuous delivery of one or more pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II to a patient in need thereof. For topical applications, repeated application can be done or a patch can be used to provide continuous administration of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II over an extended period of time.
v. Pulmonary Formulations
[0358] In one embodiment, the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II are formulated for pulmonary delivery, such as intranasal administration or oral inhalation. The respiratory tract is the structure involved in the exchange of gases between the atmosphere and the blood stream. The lungs are branching structures ultimately ending with the alveoli where the exchange of gases occurs. The alveolar surface area is the largest in the respiratory system and is where drug absorbtion occurs. The alveoli are covered by a thin epithelium without cilia or a mucus blanket and secrete surfactant phospholipids.
[0359] The respiratory tract encompasses the upper airways, including the oropharynx and larynx, followed by the lower airways, which include the trachea followed by
bifurcations into the bronchi and bronchioli. The upper and lower airways are called the conducting airways. The terminal bronchioli then divide into respiratory bronchioli which then lead to the ultimate respiratory zone, the alveoli, or deep lung. The deep lung, or alveoli, are the primary target of inhaled therapeutic aerosols for systemic drug delivery.
[0360] Pulmonary administration of therapeutic compositions comprised of low molecular weight drugs has been observed, for example, beta-andro genie antagonists to treat asthma. Other therapeutic agents that are active in the lungs have been administered systemically and targeted via pulmonary absorption. Nasal delivery is considered to be a promising technique for administration of therapeutics for the following reasons: the nose has a large surface area available for drug absorption due to the coverage of the epithelial surface by numerous microvilli, the subepithelial layer is highly vascularized, the venous blood from the nose passes directly into the systemic circulation and therefore avoids the loss of drug by first-pass metabolism in the liver, it offers lower doses, more rapid attainment of therapeutic blood levels, quicker onset of pharmacological activity, fewer side effects, high total blood flow per cm^, porous endothelial basement membrane, and it is easily accessible.
[0361] The term aerosol as used herein refers to any preparation of a fine mist of particles, which can be in solution or a suspension, whether or not it is produced using a propellant. Aerosols can be produced using standard techniques, such as ultrasonication or high pressure treatment.
[0362] Carriers for pulmonary formulations can be divided into those for dry powder formulations and for administration as solutions. Aerosols for the delivery of therapeutic agents to the respiratory tract are known in the art. For administration via the upper respiratory tract, the formulation can be formulated into a solution, e.g., water or isotonic saline, buffered or unbuffered, or as a suspension, for intranasal administration as drops or as a spray. Such solutions or suspensions are isotonic relative to nasal secretions and of about the same pH, ranging e.g., from about pH 4.0 to about pH 7.4 or, from pH 6.0 to pH 7.0. Buffers should be physiologically compatible and include, simply by way of example, phosphate buffers. For example, a representative nasal decongestant is described as being buffered to a pH of about 6.2. One skilled in the art can readily determine a suitable saline content and pH for an innocuous aqueous solution for nasal and/or upper respiratory administration.
[0363] The aqueous solutions is water, physiologically acceptable aqueous solutions containing salts and/or buffers, such as phosphate buffered saline (PBS), or any other aqueous solution acceptable for administration to a animal or human. Such solutions are well known to a person skilled in the art and include, but are not limited to, distilled water, de- ionized water, pure or ultrapure water, saline, phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Other suitable aqueous vehicles include, but are not limited to, Ringer's solution and isotonic sodium chloride. Aqueous suspensions may include suspending agents such as cellulose derivatives, sodium alginate, polyvinyl-pyrrolidone and gum tragacanth, and a wetting agent such as lecithin. Suitable preservatives for aqueous suspensions include ethyl and n-propyl p- hy dro xyb enzo at e .
[0364] In another embodiment, solvents that are low toxicity organic (i.e. nonaqueous) class 3 residual solvents, such as ethanol, acetone, ethyl acetate, tetrahydofuran, ethyl ether, and propanol may be used for the formulations. The solvent is selected based on its ability to readily aerosolize the formulation. The solvent should not detrimentally react with the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II. An appropriate solvent should be used that dissolves the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II or forms a suspension of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II. The solvent should be sufficiently volatile to enable formation of an aerosol of the solution or suspension.
Additional solvents or aerosolizing agents, such as freons, can be added as desired to increase the volatility of the solution or suspension.
[0365] In one embodiment, compositions may contain minor amounts of polymers, surfactants, or other excipients well known to those of the art. In this context, "minor amounts" means no excipients are present that might affect or mediate uptake of the pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II in the lungs and that the excipients that are present are present in amount that do not adversely affect uptake of pharmaceutical compositions having Formula I or II in the lungs.
[0366] Dry lipid powders can be directly dispersed in ethanol because of their hydrophobic character. For lipids stored in organic solvents such as chloroform, the desired quantity of solution is placed in a vial, and the chloroform is evaporated under a stream of nitrogen to form a dry thin film on the surface of a glass vial. The film swells easily when reconstituted with ethanol. To fully disperse the lipid molecules in the organic solvent, the suspension is sonicated. Nonaqueous suspensions of lipids can also be prepared in absolute ethanol using a reusable PARI LC Jet+ nebulizer (PARI Respiratory Equipment, Monterey, CA).
[0367] Dry powder formulations ("DPFs") with large particle size have improved flowability characteristics, such as less aggregation, easier aerosolization, and potentially less phagocytosis. Dry powder aerosols for inhalation therapy are generally produced with mean diameters primarily in the range of less than 5 microns, although a preferred range is between one and ten microns in aerodynamic diameter. Large "carrier" particles (containing no drug) have been co-delivered with therapeutic aerosols to aid in achieving efficient aerosolization among other possible benefits.
[0368] Polymeric particles may be prepared using single and double emulsion solvent evaporation, spray drying, solvent extraction, solvent evaporation, phase separation, simple and complex coacervation, interfacial polymerization, and other methods well known to those of ordinary skill in the art. Particles may be made using methods for making microspheres or microcapsules known in the art. The preferred methods of manufacture are by spray drying and freeze drying, which entails using a solution containing the surfactant, spraying to form droplets of the desired size, and removing the solvent.
[0369] The particles may be fabricated with the appropriate material, surface roughness, diameter and tap density for localized delivery to selected regions of the respiratory tract such as the deep lung or upper airways. For example, higher density or larger particles may be used for upper airway delivery. Similarly, a mixture of different sized particles, provided with the same or different EGS may be administered to target different regions of the lung in one administration.
[0370] Formulations for pulmonary delivery include unilamellar phospholipid vesicles, liposomes, or lipoprotein particles. Formulations and methods of making such formulations containing nucleic acid are well known to one of ordinary skill in the art. Liposomes are formed from commercially available phospholipids supplied by a variety of vendors including Avanti Polar Lipids, Inc. (Birmingham, Ala.). In one embodiment, the liposome can include a ligand molecule specific for a receptor on the surface of the target cell to direct the liposome to the target cell. D. Examples
[0371] Various embodiments will be further clarified by the following examples.
1. Materials and methods
i. Materials
[0372] Zaprinast was obtained from BioMol International Inc (Plymouth Meeting, PA). Epic® 384 biosensor microplates cell culture compatible were obtained from Corning Inc. (Corning, NY). Compounds with a purity greater than 95% were purchased from various vendors or custom synthesized. CID2745687 (SPB05142) was obtained from Ryan Scientific, Inc. (Mt. Pleasant, SC).
[0373] HT-29 cells were obtained from American Type Cell Culture (Manassas, VA). The cell culture medium was McCoy's 5a Medium Modified supplemented with 10% FBS, 4.5g/liter glucose, 2 mM glutamine, and antibiotics.
[0374] Tango™ GPR35-bla U20S cells were purchased from Invitrogen. The cells were cultured according to the protocols recommended by the supplier. Briefly, the cells were passed using McCoy's 5A medium (Invitrogen 16600-082) supplemented with 10%> dialyzed fetal bovine serum, 0.1 μΜ NEAA, 25 μΜ Hepes (pH 7.3), ImM sodium pyruvate, 100 U/ml penicillin, 100 μg/ml streptomycin, 200 μg/ml zeocin, 50 μg/ml hygromycin, and 100 μg/ml geneticin in a humidified 37°C/5% C02 incubator.
ii. Western blot using HT29 cells
[0375] HT29 cells (107 cells per sample) were harvested and lysed in 1%> NP40 lysis buffer (150 mM NaCl, 25 mM Tris, 1% NP 40, pH 7.5) with protease inhibitors cocktail (Roche). Proteins were separated on 15% SDS gel. Membrane was blotted with rabbit anti- GPR35 (1 : 1000) (Abeam, Ab76217) at 4°C overnight, then with 2nd HRP conjugated Goat anti-rabbit or Horse anti-goat antibody (1 :2000 dilution) for 30 minutes. Western blots were developed using the ECL plus kit (GE Healthcare) on a Fujifilm Luminescent Image
Analyzer LAS 3000 (Fujifilm, Valhalla, NY).
Hi. Immunofluorescence confocal imaging
[0376] HT29 cells were plated on a 8-well chamber slide (10,000 cells/well) and incubated at 37°C for 24 firs. Next day, cells were fixed with 4% formaldehyde in 1 x PBS for 15 min, followed by blocking and permeabilization in a buffer that contains 4% goat serum, 0.1 % BSA, 0.1% Triton XI 00 in 1 x PBS for 2 hrs. After 5 min wash with PBS, fixed cells were incubated with primary antibody anti-GPR35 (Abeam) (1 :300) in 3% BSA/PBS buffer for 24 firs, followed by incubation with secondary antibody Alexa Fluor® 488 goat anti-rabbit IgG (H+L) (Invitrogen) (1 :250) in 3% BSA/PBS for 1 hr at room temperature. Cells were finally washed once with PBS and sealed with 1.5 mm thick glass cover-slip. Dried slides were stored at 4°C until imaging. Confocal imaging was performed with Zeiss confocal microscope Axiovert 40. For GPR35 internalization study, after cells were incubated at 37°C for 24 hrs, they were treated with different ligands for GPR35 at 37 °C for 1 hr before fixation (Zaprinast, 10 μΜ; Niflumic acid, 20 μΜ; YE210, 20 μΜ;
Talniflumate, 20 μΜ; Diclofenac, 20 μΜ; Furosemide, 20 μΜ). Confocal images were analyzed using MacBiopho tonics Image J software.
iv. Optical Biosensor System and Cell Assays
[0377] Epic® beta version wavelength interrogation system (Corning Inc., Corning, NY) was used for whole cell sensing. This system consists of a temperature-control unit, an optical detection unit, and an on-board liquid handling unit with robotics. The detection unit is centered on integrated fiber optics, and enables kinetic measures of cellular responses with a time interval of ~15sec. Also Epic® commercial systems were used, wherein a liquid handler accessory was attached to Epic® reader system.
[0378] The RWG biosensor is capable of detecting minute changes in local index of refraction near the sensor surface. Since the local index of refraction within a cell is a function of density and its distribution of biomass (e.g., proteins, molecular complexes), the biosensor exploits its evanescent wave to non-invasively detect ligand-induced dynamic mass redistribution in native cells. The evanescent wave extends into the cells and exponentially decays over distance, leading to a characteristic sensing volume of -150 nm, implying that any optical response mediated through the receptor activation only represents an average over the portion of the cell that the evanescent wave is sampling. The aggregation of many cellular events downstream the receptor activation determines the kinetics and amplitudes of a ligand-induced DMR.
[0379] For biosensor cellular assays, cells were typically grown using ~1 to 2 x 104 cells per well at passage 3 to 15 suspended in 50 μΐ of the corresponding culture medium in the biosensor microplate, and were cultured at 37 °C under air/5% C02 for ~1 day. The confluency for all cells at the time of assays was -95% to 100%. The molecule solutions were made by diluting the stored concentrated solutions with the HBSS (lx Hanks balanced salt solution, plus 20mM Hepes, pH 7.1), and transferred into a 384well polypropylene molecule storage plate to prepare a molecule source plate. Both molecule and marker source plates were made separately when a two-step assay was performed. In parallel, the cells were washed twice with the HBSS and maintained in 30μ1 of the HBSS to prepare a cell assay plate. Both the cell assay plate and the molecule and marker source plate(s) were then incubated in the hotel of the reader system. After ~lhr of incubation the baseline
wavelengths of all biosensors in the cell assay microplate were recorded and normalized to zero. Afterwards, a 2 to 10 minute continuous recording was carried out to establish a baseline, and to ensure that the cells reached a steady state. Cellular responses were then triggered by pipetting ΙΟμΙ of the marker solutions into the cell assay plate using the on-board liquid handler.
[0380] To study the influence of molecules on a marker-induced response, a second stimulation with the marker at a fixed dose (typically at EC80 or EC 100) was applied. The resonant wavelengths of all biosensors in the microplate were normalized again to establish a second baseline, right before the second stimulation. The two stimulations were usually separated by ~lhr.
[0381] All studies were carried out at a controlled temperature (28°C). At least two independent sets of experiments, each with at least three replicates, were performed. The assay coefficient of variation was found to be <10%.
v. Tango β-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays
[0382] Tango™ GPR35-£/a U20S cells was used. This cell line stably expresses two fusion proteins: human GPR35 linked to a TEV protease site and a Gal4-VP16 transcription factor, and β-arrestin/TEV protease fusion protein. The cell line also stably expresses the β- lactamase reporter gene under the control of a UAS response element. The activation of GPR35 by agonists leads to the recruitment of β-arrestin/TEV protease fusion proteins to the activated GPR35. As a result, the protease cleaves the Gal4-VP16 transcription factor from the receptor, which then translocates to the nucleus and activates the expression of beta- lactamase. Briefly, 10000 cells per well were seeded in 384-well, black- wall, clear bottom assay plates with low fluorescence background (Corning), and cultured in DMEM
(Invitrogen, 10569-010) supplemented with 10% dialyzed fetal bovine serum, 0.1 μΜ NEAA, 25 μΜ Hepes (pH 7.3), 100 U/ml Penicillin, and 100 μg/ml Streptomycin. After overnight culture, the cells were stimulated with ligands for 5 firs in a humidified 37°C/5% C02, and then loaded with the cell permeable LiveBLAzer™ FRET B/G substrate. After the two hour incubation the coumarin: fluorescein ratio was measured using Tecan Safire II microplate reader (Mannedorf, Switzerland). In the absence of beta- lactamase expression (i.e., no GPR35 activation), cells generate green fluorescence. In the presence of beta- lactamase expression upon receptor activation, the substrate is cleaved and the cells generate blue fluorescence. The coumarin: fluorescein ratio was used as a normalized reporter response. 2. Example 1 - DMR assays to characterize GPR35 agonists
[0383] It has been shown that real time PCR that HT29 expresses relatively high level of GPR35, at least at mRNA level (Fang, Y. et al, US Patent Application 61/365,861 , which is hereby incorporated by reference by its entirety). It was also showed using western blotting that HT29 lysates contain GPR35 iso forms, whose molecular weight is close to the expected values for both GPR35a and GPR35b, respectively. Confocal imaging further showed that GPR35 is primarily located at the cell surface plasma membrane (Fig.4A). HT29 is a human colon adenocarcinoma grade II cell line.
[0384] DMR assays showed that bumetanide resulted in a dose dependent DMR signal in HT29 cells, leading to an EC50 of 1.8+0.5μΜ. Bumetanide also caused a dose-dependent desensitization of HT29 cells upon stimulation with the known GPR35 agonist zaprinast (ΙμΜ), leading to an IC50 of 3.3+0.3μΜ. Taken together, these results indicate that bumetanide is a GPR35 agonist.
[0385] A series of compounds described in Formula I and II also led to dose dependent DMR in HT29 cells, and also caused desensitization of HT29 upon stimulation with zaprinast. The representative DMR signals of these compounds at a saturating dose are showed in Figure 2A-L. The results are summarized in Table I and Table II.
Figure imgf000090_0001
Formula I
Figure imgf000090_0002
Figure imgf000091_0001
acid
Figure imgf000091_0002
Formula II
Figure imgf000091_0003
Figure imgf000092_0001
[0386] Similarly, several compounds belong to the compounds described in Formula II also behaved similarly to the known GPR35 agonists such as pamoic acid and zaprinast. The EC50 to result in DMR signals in HT29 was found to be 1.0±0.1μΜ for myricetin, 2.1±0.2μΜ for lapachol, 25+3 μΜ for baicalein, 8+0.5μΜ for 5 -hydroxy- 1,4- naphthoquinone, 1.1+0.2μΜ for morin hydrate, 7.2+0.5μΜ for compound 1, 12+2μΜ for compound 2. Compounds 3 to 22 also led to dose-dependent DMR signals in HT29.
[0387] Although the DMR signatures (e.g., amplitudes, kinetics) were different from compound to compound (see, for example, Figure 2), all these compounds at the saturating concentration almost completely desensitized the cells responding to the repeated stimulation with the known GPR35 agonist zaprinast at Ι μΜ. These results suggest that these compounds are GPR35 agonists but with different intrinsic efficacies.
[0388] Further, the known antagonist CID2745687 (methyl-5-[(tert- butylcarbamothioylhydrazinylidene)methyl]-l-(2,4-difluorophenyl)-pyrazole-4- carboxylate) also dose-dependently blocked the DMR signals arising from these agonists, each at its respective EC80 concentration, as exampled in Fig.5. These results further confirmed that these ligands are reversible and competitive GPR35 agonists.
[0389] Taken together, these results indicate that these compounds are GPR35 agonists.
The chemical structures of these compounds are shown below.
Figure imgf000092_0002
Myricetin Morin hydrate Baicalein
Figure imgf000093_0001
5-hydroxy-1 ,4-naphtoquinone Compound 2
Figure imgf000093_0002
Compound 3 Compound 4 Compound 5 Compound 6
Figure imgf000093_0003
Compound 7 Compound 8 Compound 9 Compound 10
Figure imgf000093_0004
Compound 11 Compound 12 Compound 13 14
Figure imgf000093_0005
Compound 15 Compound 16 Compound 17 Compound 18
Figure imgf000093_0006
Compound 19 Compound 20 Compound 21 Compound 22
3. Example 2 ERK activation induced by GPR35 agonists
[0390] To further determine the agonism activity of GPR35 agonists identified using DMR assays, the phosphorylation of ERK proteins was measured upon stimulation with various GPR35 agonists. Western blotting showed that gentisate, DHMA, T3 and HIBA, each at the two doses tested, all resulted in a significant increase in phosphorylated ERKl/2, compared to the negative control, cells treated with 0.25% DMSO only which did not cause any phosphorylation of ERKl/2 (Fig.2). ERK phosphorylation is a hallmark of GPCR activation and signaling. 4. Example 3 GPR35 internalization induced by GPR35 agonists
[0391] Receptor internalization is another hallmark of GPCR activation and signaling. To test the agonism activity of GPR35 agonists identified, confocal imaging was used to visualize the location of GPR35 upon receptor activation by GPR35 agonists. Results showed that the fluorescence from stained GPR35 primary appears at the cell plasma surface, when the cells were treated with 0.25% DMSO only, suggesting that indeed GPR35 is a cell plasma membrane bound receptor. Further, like the known GPR35 agonist pamoic acid, all other four GPR35 agonists tested (luciferin, L-DOPA, nitro-L-tyrosine and compound 2) resulted in internalization of GPR35 from plasma membrane to intracellular organelles (e.g., endosomes) (Fig.3), further indicating that these compounds are indeed GPR35 agonists.
5. Example 4 Tango beta-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays
[0392] Many GPCR ligands are known to exhibit biased agonism activity via beta- arrestin mediated pathways. Thus, we further characterized these agonists using Tango beta- arrestin translocation gene reporter assays. This assay uses Tango GPR35-bla U20S cells to detect GPR35 agonist-induced recruitment of TEV protease tagged β-arrestin molecules to the GPR35-Gal4-VP16 transcription factor fusion protein linked by a TEV protease cleavage site. The β-arrestin recruitment leads to release of the transcription factor from the C-terminus of GPR35, which, in turn, translocates to the nucleus and activates the expression of β- lactamase. The activity of β-lactamase is then assayed with the cell permeable LiveBLAzer™ FRET B/G substrate. Results showed that zaprinast led to a dose dependent response in Tango™ GPR35-bla U20S cells with a significantly right-shifted potency (EC50 of
4.20±0.25 μΜ, n=4). The following ligands were found to be active in the beta-arrestin translocation gene reporter assays: laccaic acid, baicalein, catechin, gallic acid, hematin, gentisic acid, benserazide, myricetin, morin, alpha-cyano-4-hydroxycinnamic acid, wedelolactone, lapachol, ellagic acid, caffeic acid, compounds 1, 3, 6, 10, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,19, 20, and 22. Considering the common right-shifted potency of GPR35 agonists obtained using the Tango assay, one can not rule out the possibility that the other compounds capable of triggering GPR35 specific DMR in HT29 may also be active but with much lower potency. Collectively, these results showed that these compounds are GPR35 agonists. 6. Example 5 Synthesis of compounds 1 to 22
[0393] All compounds 1 to 22 were synthesized in house. The synthesis of compound 20 was used as an example to show the general procedure. The compound 20 was synthesized according to the following scheme. It consists of 6 steps.
Figure imgf000095_0001
Compound 20
(a) synthesis of l-(2-bromo-5-methoxyphenyl)ethanol (A)
[0394] To a solution of 2-bromo-5-methoxybenzaldehyde (4.0 g, 18.6 mmol) in THF (80 ml) was added methylmagnesium bromide (20 mL, 20 mmol) dropwise at -78 °C under N2. After stirring for 30 minutes, the reaction was quenched with water (200 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (80 mL*3). After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc =10:1) to give A (3.8 g, 88% yield) as yellow oil.
(b) synthesis of l-(2-bromo-5-methoxyphenyl)ethanone (B)
[0395] To a solution of A (3.8 g, 16.5 mmol) in DCM (100 mL) was added PCC (8.4 g, 33.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The reaction was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc =5: 1) to give B (3.6 g, 95% yield) as off-white solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ ppm 7.45 (d, 1H), 6.96 (d, 1H), 6.82 (dd, 1H), 4.38 (q, 2H), 3.80(1, 3H), 2.62 (s, 3H).
(c) synthesis of Ethyl 5-methoxy-3-methylbenzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxylate (C)
[0396] To a solution of B (1.4 g, 6.1 mmol) and K2C03 (1.7 g, 12.2 mmol) in DMF (30 mL) was added ethyl 2-mercaptoacetate (0.96 g, 7.93 mmol) dropwise at 70 °C, a catalytic amount of 18-crown-6 was added. After stirring continued for 16 hours at 80 °C, the reaction was quenched with water (200 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (50 mL*3). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2S04. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc =10: 1) to give C (900 mg, 63% yield) as off-white solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, CDC13) δ ppm 7.67 (d, 1H), 7.21 (d, 1H), 7.11 (dd, 1H), 4.38 (q, 2H), 3.89(1, 3H), 2.73 (s, 3H), 1.41 (t, 3H).
(d) synthesis of ethyl 5-hydroxy-3-methylbenzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxylate (D)
[0397] To the solution of C (300mg, 1.2 mmol) in DCM (10 mL) was added BBr3 (0.2 mL, 2.4 mmol) dropwise at -78 °C. The mixture was stirred for 6 hours at room temperature. The mixture was quenched with water (10 mL), extracted with EtOAc (10 mL*3). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2S04. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc =2: 1) to give 4 (60 mg, 21% yield) as off-white solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-<¾) δ ppm 13.26 (m, 1H), 9.67 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, 1H), 7.22 (s, 1H), 7.07 (d, 1H), 2.64 (s, 3H).
(e) synthesis of ethyl 4,6-dibromo-5-hydroxy-3-methylbenzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxylate (E)
[0398] To the solution of D (60mg, 0.25 mmol) in HO Ac (5 mL) was added Br2 (120 mg, 0.75 mmol) at 0 °C. The mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. The mixture was quenched with water (10 mL), extracted with EtOAc (10 mL*3). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2S04. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (petroleum ether/EtOAc =2: 1) to compound E (30 mg, 30%) yield) as off-white solid.
(f) synthesis of 4,6-dibromo-5-hydroxy-3-methylbenzo[b]thiophene-2-carboxylic acid (compound 20)
[0399] To the solution of E (30 mg, 0.076 mmol) in EtOH/H20 (5 mL/5 mL) was added LiOH (10 mg, 0.38 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 16 hours at room temperature. After removal of the solvent, the residue was adjusted to pH 2-3, extracted with EtOAc (10 mL*3). The combined organic layers were dried over Na2S04. After removal of the solvent, the residue was purified by pre-HPLC to compound 20 (8 mg, 29%> yield) as off-white solid: 1H NMR (300 MHz, DMSO-<¾) δ ppm 13.62 (m, 1H), 9.92 (s, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 3.04 (s, 3H). LCMS (m/z) ES- 363, 365(M-H).
E. SEQUENCES [0400] The protein sequence of GPR35a (UniProtKB/Swiss-Prot:Q9HC97) (SEQ ID NO: l) is
MNGTYNTCGSSDLTWPPAIKLGFYAYLGVLLVLGLLLNSLALWVFCCRMQQWTET
RIYMTNLAVADLCLLCTLPFVLHSLRDTSDTPLCQLSQGIYLTNRYMSISLVTAIAVD
RYVAVRHPLRARGLRSPRQAAAVCAVLWVLVIGSLVARWLLGIQEGGFCFRSTRHN
FNSMAFPLLGFYLPLAVVVFCSLKVVTALAQRPPTDVGQAEATRKAARMVWANLL
VFVVCFLPLHVGLTVRLAVGWNACALLETIRRALYITSKLSDANCCLDAICYYYMA
KEFQEASALAVAPSAKAHKSQDSLCVTLA
[0401] The Homo sapiens G protein-coupled receptor 35a (GPR35a), mRNA (NCBI Reference Sequence: NM 005301.2) (SEQ ID NO:2) is
1 caggccagag tcccagctgt cctggactct gctgtgggga agggctgatg caggtgtgga
61 gtcaaatgtg ggtgcctcct gcagccgggt gccaggaggg gtggaggggc caccctgggc
121 tttgtccggg agcctggtct tcccgtcctt gggctgacag gtgctgctgc ctctgagccc
181 tccctgctaa gagctgtgtg ctgggtaagg ctggtggccc tttgggctcc ctgtccagga
241 tttgtgctct ggagggtagg gcttgctggg ctggggactg gaggggaacg tggagctcct
301 tctgcctcct ttcctgcccc atgacagcag gcagatccca ggagagaaga gctcaggaga
361 tgggaagagg atctgtccag gggttagacc tcaagggtga cttggagttc tttacggcac
421 ccatgctttc tttgaggagt tttgtgtttg tgggtgtggg gtcggggctc acctcctccc
481 acatccctgc ccagaggtgg gcagagtggg ggcagtgcct tgctccccct gctcgctctc
541 tgctgacctc cggctccctg tgctgcccca ggaccatgaa tggcacctac aacacctgtg
601 gctccagcga cctcacctgg cccccagcga tcaagctggg cttctacgcc tacttgggcg
661 tcctgctggt gctaggcctg ctgctcaaca gcctggcgct ctgggtgttc tgctgccgca
721 tgcagcagtg gacggagacc cgcatctaca tgaccaacct ggcggtggcc gacctctgcc
781 tgctgtgcac cttgcccttc gtgctgcact ccctgcgaga cacctcagac acgccgctgt
841 gccagctctc ccagggcatc tacctgacca acaggtacat gagcatcagc ctggtcacgg
901 ccatcgccgt ggaccgctat gtggccgtgc ggcacccgct gcgtgcccgc gggctgcggt
961 cccccaggca ggctgcggcc gtgtgcgcgg tcctctgggt gctggtcatc ggctccctgg
1021 tggctcgctg gctcctgggg attcaggagg gcggcttctg cttcaggagc acccggcaca
1081 atttcaactc catggcgttc ccgctgctgg gattctacct gcccctggcc gtggtggtct
1141 tctgctccct gaaggtggtg actgccctgg cccagaggcc acccaccgac gtggggcagg
1201 cagaggccac ccgcaaggct gcccgcatgg tctgggccaa cctcctggtg ttcgtggtct
1261 gcttcctgcc cctgcacgtg gggctgacag tgcgcctcgc agtgggctgg aacgcctgtg
1321 ccctcctgga gacgatccgt cgcgccctgt acataaccag caagctctca gatgccaact
1381 gctgcctgga cgccatctgc tactactaca tggccaagga gttccaggag gcgtctgcac
1441 tggccgtggc tcccagtgct aaggcccaca aaagccagga ctctctgtgc gtgaccctcg
1501 cctaagaggc gtgctgtggg cgctgtgggc caggtctcgg gggctccggg aggtgctgcc
1561 tgccagggga agctggaacc agtagcaagg agcccgggat cagccctgaa ctcactgtgt
1621 attctcttgg agccttgggt gggcagggac ggcccaggta cctgctctct tgggaagaga
1681 gagggacagg gacaagggca agaggactga ggccagagca aggccaatgt cagagacccc 1741 cgggatgggg cctcacactt gccaccccca gaaccagctc acctggccag agtgggttcc 1801 tgctggccag ggtgcagcct tgatgacacc tgccgctgcc cctcggggct ggaataaaac 1861 tccccaccca gagtc
[0402] The cDNA sequence for GPR35a (SEQ ID NO:3):
ATGAATGGCACCTACAACACCTGTG
26 GCTCCAGCGACCTCACCTGGCCCCCAGCGATCAAGCTGGGCTTCTACGCCTACTTGGGCG
86 TCCTGCTGGTGCTAGGCCTGCTGCTCAACAGCCTGGCGCTCTGGGTGTTCTGCTGCCGCA
146 TGCAGCAGTGGACGGAGACCCGCATCTACATGACCAACCTGGCGGTGGCCGACCTCTGCC
206 TGCTGTGCACCTTGCCCTTCGTGCTGCACTCCCTGCGAGACACCTCAGACACGCCGCTGT
266 GCCAGCTCTCCCAGGGCATCTACCTGACCAACAGGTACATGAGCATCAGCCTGGTCACGG
326 CCATCGCCGTGGACCGCTATGTGGCCGTGCGGCACCCGCTGCGTGCCCGCGGGCTGCGGT
386 CCCCCAGGCAGGCTGCGGCCGTGTGCGCGGTCCTCTGGGTGCTGGTCATCGGCTCCCTGG
446 TGGCTCGCTGGCTCCTGGGGATTCAGGAGGGCGGCTTCTGCTTCAGGAGCACCCGGCACA
506 ATTTCAACTCCATGGCGTTCCCGCTGCTGGGATTCTACCTGCCCCTGGCCGTGGTGGTCT
566 TCTGCTCCCTGAAGGTGGTGACTGCCCTGGCCCAGAGGCCACCCACCGACGTGGGGCAGG
626 CAGAGGCCACCCGCAAGGCTGCCCGCATGGTCTGGGCCAACCTCCTGGTGTTCGTGGTCT
686 GCTTCCTGCCCCTGCACGTGGGGCTGACAGTGCGCCTCGCAGTGGGCTGGAACGCCTGTG
746 CCCTCCTGGAGACGATCCGTCGCGCCCTGTACATAACCAGCAAGCTCTCAGATGCCAACT
806 GCTGCCTGGACGCCATCTGCTACTACTACATGGCCAAGGAGTTCCAGGAGGCGTCTGCAC
866 TGGCCGTGGCTCCCAGTGCTAAGGCCCACAAAAGCCAGGACTCTCTGTGCGTGACCCTCG
926 CCTAA
[0403] The protein sequence of GPR35b (SEQ ID NO:4) (S. Okumura, H. Baba, T. Kumada, K. Nanmoku, H. Nakajima, Y. Nakane, K. Hioki, K. Ikenaka (2004) Cloning of a G-protein-cou led receptor that shows an activity to transform NIH3T3 cells and is expressed in gastric cancer cells, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135) is
MLSGSPvAVPTPHRGSEELLKYMLHSPCVSLTMNGTYNTCGSSDLTWPPAIKLGFYAYLG VLLVLGLLLNSLALWVFCCRMQQWTETRIYMTNLAVADLCLLCTLPFVLHSLRDTSDTPLCQ LSQGIYLTNRYMSISLVTAIAVDRYVAVRHPLRARGLRSPRQAAAVCAVLWVLVIGSLVAR WLLGIQEGGFCFRSTRHNFNSMAFPLLGFYLPLAVWFCSLKWTALAQRPPTDVGQAEATR KAARMVWANLLVFWCFLPLHVGLTVRLAVGWNACALLETIRRALYITSKLSDANCCLDAI CYYYMAKEFQEASALAVAPRAKAHKSQDSLCVTLA
[0404] The cDNA sequence of GPR35b (SEQ ID NO:5) is
1 ATGCTGAGTGGTTCCCGGGCTGTCCCCACTCCACACCGTGGCAGTGAAGAGCTGCTGAAG
61 TACATGCTTCATAGTCCTTGCGTCTCTCTGACCATGAATGGCACCTACAACACCTGTGGC
121 TCCAGCGACCTCACCTGGCCCCCAGCGATCAAGCTGGGCTTCTACGCCTACTTGGGCGTC 181 CTGCTGGTGCTAGGCCTGCTGCTCAACAGCCTGGCGCTCTGGGTGTTCTGCTGCCGCATG
241 CAGCAGTGGACGGAGACCCGCATCTACATGACCAACCTGGCGGTGGCCGACCTCTGCCTG
301 CTGTGCACCTTGCCCTTCGTGCTGCACTCCCTGCGAGACACCTCAGACACGCCGCTGTGC
361 CAGCTCTCCCAGGGCATCTACCTGACCAACAGGTACATGAGCATCAGCCTGGTCACGGCC
421 ATCGCCGTGGACCGCTATGTGGCCGTGCGGCACCCGCTGCGTGCCCGCGGGCTGCGGTCC
481 CCCAGGCAGGCTGCGGCCGTGTGCGCGGTCCTCTGGGTGCTGGTCATCGGCTCCCTGGTG
541 GCTCGCTGGCTCCTGGGGATTCAGGAGGGCGGCTTCTGCTTCAGGAGCACCCGGCACAAT
601 TTCAACTCCATGGCGTTCCCGCTGCTGGGATTCTACCTGCCCCTGGCCGTGGTGGTCTTC
661 TGCTCCCTGAAGGTGGTGACTGCCCTGGCCCAGAGGCCACCCACCGACGTGGGGCAGGCA
721 GAGGCCACCCGCAAGGCTGCCCGCATGGTCTGGGCCAACCTCCTGGTGTTCGTGGTCTGC
781 TTCCTGCCCCTGCACGTGGGGCTGACAGTGCGCCTCGCAGTGGGCTGGAACGCCTGTGCC
841 CTCCTGGAGACGATCCGTCGCGCCCTGTACATAACCAGCAAGCTCTCAGATGCCAACTGC
901 TGCCTGGACGCCATCTGCTACTACTACATGGCCAAGGAGTTCCAGGAGGCGTCTGCACTG
961 GCCGTGGCTCCCAGTGCTAAGGCCCACAAAAGCCAGGACTCTCTGTGCGTGACCCTCGCC
1021 TAA
References
1. U.S. Application No. 61/365,861. Fang, Y., Deng, H., Hu, H., Sun, H., He, M., Niu, W. Compositions and methods for the treatment of pathological conditions related to GPR35 and/or GPR35-hERG complex.
2. US20070077602 Al "GPR35 and modulators thereof for the treatment of
metabolic-related disorders"
3. WO2011011235 Al "TREATMENT OF DISORDERS ASSOCIATED WITH G PROTEIN-COUPLED RECEPTOR 35 (GPR35)"
4. WO2005085867 A8 "Screening method for emulators of neural activity and digestive system using gpr35"
5. WO2005059546 A3 "DIAGNOSTICS AND THERAPEUTICS FOR DISEASES ASSOCIATED WITH G PROTEIN-COUPLED RECEPTOR 35 (GPR35)"
6. J. Guo, D.J. Williams, H.L. Puhl III, S.R. Ikeda (2008) Inhibition of N-type
calcium channels by activation of GPR35, an orphan receptor, heterologously expressed in rat sympathetic neurons, J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 324: 342-351
7. Jenkins, L., Brea, J., Smith, N.J., Hudson, B.D., Reilly, G., Bryant, N.J., Castro, M., Loza, M.-L, Milligan, G. (2010) Identification of novel species-selective agonists of the G-protein-coupled receptor GPR35 that promote recruitment of β- arrestin-2 and activate Gal3. Biochemical Journal 432, 451-459 B.F. O'Dowd, T. Nguyen, A. Marchese, R. Cheng, K.R. Lynch, H.H. Heng, L.F. Kolakowski Jr, S.R. George (1998) Discovery of three novel G-protein-cou led receptor genes, Genomics 47: 310-313
S. Oka, R. Ota, M. Shima, A. Yamashita, T. Sugiura (2010) GPR35 is a novel lysophosphatidic acid receptor. Biochem. Biophys. Res. Comm. 395: 232-237 S. Okumura, H. Baba, T. Kumada, K. Nanmoku, H. Nakajima, Y. Nakane, K. Hioki, K. Ikenaka (2004) Cloning of a G-protein-coupled receptor that shows an activity to transform NIH3T3 cells and is expressed in gastric cancer cells, Cancer Sci. 95: 131-135
H. Ohshiro, H. Tonai-Kachi, K. Ichikawa (2008) GPR35 is a functional receptor in rat dorsal root ganglion neurons, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 365: 344- 348.
K.D. Min, M. Asakura, Y. Liao, K. Nakamaru, H. Okazaki, T. Takahashi, K. Fujimoto, S. Ito, A. Takahashi, H. Asanuma, S. Yamazaki, T. Minamino, S.
Sanada, O. Seguchi, A. Nakano, Y. Ando, T. Otsuka, H. Furukawa, T. Isomura, S. Takashima, N. Mochizuki, M. Kitakaze (2010) Identification of genes related to heart failure using global gene expression profiling of human failing myocardium, Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. 393: 55-60.
A.E. Shrimpton, B.R. Braddock, L.L. Thomson, C.K. Stein, J.J. Hoo (2004) Molecular delineation of deletions on 2q37.3 in three cases with an Albright hereditary osteodystrophy- like phenotype, Clin. Genet. 66: 537-544
J. Wang, N. Simonavicius, X. Wu, G. Swaminath, J. Reagan, H. Tian, L. Ling, (2006) Kynurenic acid as a ligand for orphan G protein-coupled receptor GPR35, J. Biol. Chem. 281 : 22021-22028;

Claims

Claims What is claimed is:
1. A method of reducing the risk of and/or treating disease in a subject, comprising administering to the subject a therapeutically effective amount of a compound having
Formul
Figure imgf000101_0001
Formula I or Formula II
wherein:
R1 is present or absent, if present R1 is substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl;
R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are each individually -H, -OH, -N02, -S02NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy;
R3 and R4 optionally together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
R8 is -H, -OH, -NO2, -S02(NH3)2, halide, -COOH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted -alkyl-COOH, or -alkenyl-COOH.
R7, R9, R10, R11 and R12 are each individually -H, -OH, -N02, -S02NH3, -COOH, halide, acyl halide, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl, substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkylaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl, substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl, or a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy;
R7 and R8 optionally together form a substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted heteroaryl, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclyl;
X is -C(O)-, -CHR13-, -0-, -S-or -NR14-;
R13 is -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl;
R14 is -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl;
Y is present or absent, if present Y is -C(O)-, -CHR15-, -0-, -S-, or -NR16-;
R15 is -H, -OH, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl;
R16 is -H, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof; and wherein the disease is a pathophysio logically related to GPR35 activity.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein R1 is present and at least one, two, three or four of R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are not -H.
3. The method of claim 2, wherein R1 is -present and is CH2, -CH=CH-, CH2CH(CN)-, - CH2CH(OH)-, -CH2C(0)-, -CH2CH(NH2)- or -CH2C(CH3)(NH2)-.
4. The method of claim 2, wherein R2 is -H or halide.
5. The method of claim 4, wherein R3, R4, R5 and R6 are -H, -OH, halide or substituted or unsubstituted -O-aryl.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein R1 is absent and R2, R3, R4, R5 and R6 are each individually -H, -OH, halide, substituted or unsubstituted -NH-alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted -S02NH3 or substituted or unsubstituted -O- aryl.
7. The method of claim 1 , wherein R3 and R4 together form a heterocyclyl.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the Formula II has the structure:
Figure imgf000103_0001
9. The method of claim 8, wherein R7 and R8 together form a substituted or
unsubstituted aryl.
10. The method of claim 9, wherein Formula II has the structure:
Figure imgf000103_0002
11. The method of claim 8, wherein R is -OH.
12. The method of claim 11 , wherein R9 is -OH.
13. The method of claim 8, wherein R7 is substituted or unsubstituted aryl, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl or substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl.
14. The method of claim 8, wherein R11 is -OH or substituted or unsubstituted aryl.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein Formula II has the structure:
Figure imgf000103_0003
wherein X is -0-, -S- or -NH-.
16. The method of claim 15, wherein X is -S- or -NH-.
17. The method of claim 15, R10 and R11 are -OH.
Figure imgf000104_0001
103
Figure imgf000105_0001
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the disease is selected from the group consisting of inflammation, metabolic disorder, congestive heart failure, and cancer.
20. The method of claim 1, wherein the Formula I or II or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, solvate, clathrate or produg thereof, is a GPR35 modulator.
21. The method of claim 19, wherein the metabolic disorder is selected from the group consisting of diabetes, Type I diabetes, Type II diabetes, inadequate glucose tolerance, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, hyperlipidemia, hypertriglyceridemia, hypercholesterolemia, dyslipidemia, obesity, aging, Syndrome X, atherosclerosis, heart disease, stroke, hypertension and peripheral vascular disease.
22. The method of claim 19, wherein the cancer is selected from the group consisting of prostate cancer, leukemia, hormone dependent cancers, breast cancer, colon cancer, lung cancer, epidermal cancer, liver cancer, esophageal cancer, stomach cancer, cancer of the brain, and cancer of the kidney.
23. The method of claim 19, wherein the compound or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, is administered by one or more routes selected from a group consisting of rectal, buccal, sublingual, intravenous, subcutaneous, intradermal, transdermal, intraperitoneal, oral, eye drops, parenteral and topical administration.
24. A pharmaceutical composition having the Formula I or II in claim 1.
PCT/US2012/049483 2011-08-05 2012-08-03 Gpr35 ligands and the uses thereof WO2013022740A2 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161515409P 2011-08-05 2011-08-05
US61/515,409 2011-08-05

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013022740A2 true WO2013022740A2 (en) 2013-02-14
WO2013022740A3 WO2013022740A3 (en) 2013-05-10

Family

ID=47669171

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2012/049483 WO2013022740A2 (en) 2011-08-05 2012-08-03 Gpr35 ligands and the uses thereof

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2013022740A2 (en)

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2014163512A1 (en) * 2013-04-05 2014-10-09 Manuka Health New Zealand Limited Therapeutic compositions comprising extracts of propolis and uses thereof
US9155727B2 (en) 2013-05-28 2015-10-13 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
WO2016010440A1 (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 Manuka Health New Zealand Limited Propolis and extracts thereof for the treatment of skin cancers and improvement of skin health
WO2018210658A1 (en) * 2017-05-15 2018-11-22 Basf Se Heteroaryl compounds as agrochemical fungicides
CN109602735A (en) * 2018-12-07 2019-04-12 广州市妇女儿童医疗中心 The application of the drug and alpha-cyano -4- hydroxycinnamic acid of prevention and/or treatment intestines problem
US10457679B2 (en) 2015-09-17 2019-10-29 Astrazeneca Ab Imidazo[4,5-c]quinolin-2-one compounds and their use in treating cancer
CN111285790A (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-06-16 泰州医药城国科化物生物医药科技有限公司 3-carboxycoumarin derivative capable of serving as GPR35 agonist, preparation method and application
US10745358B2 (en) 2017-11-20 2020-08-18 Silicon Swat, Inc. Oxoacridinyl acetic acid derivatives and methods of use
US11414387B2 (en) 2017-11-20 2022-08-16 Stingthera, Inc. Oxoacridinyl acetic acid derivatives and methods of use
US11820747B2 (en) 2021-11-02 2023-11-21 Flare Therapeutics Inc. PPARG inverse agonists and uses thereof
US11827627B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-11-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated N-(hydroxyalkyl (hetero)aryl) tetrahydrofuran carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
US11834441B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2023-12-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005059546A2 (en) * 2003-12-12 2005-06-30 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with g protein-coupled receptor 35 (gpr35)
US20070077602A1 (en) * 2004-05-26 2007-04-05 Leonard James N GPR35 and modulators thereof for the treatment of metabolic-related disorders
WO2011011235A1 (en) * 2009-07-22 2011-01-27 Temple University - Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Treatment of disorders associated with g protein-coupled receptor 35 (gpr35)

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005059546A2 (en) * 2003-12-12 2005-06-30 Bayer Healthcare Ag Diagnostics and therapeutics for diseases associated with g protein-coupled receptor 35 (gpr35)
US20070077602A1 (en) * 2004-05-26 2007-04-05 Leonard James N GPR35 and modulators thereof for the treatment of metabolic-related disorders
WO2011011235A1 (en) * 2009-07-22 2011-01-27 Temple University - Of The Commonwealth System Of Higher Education Treatment of disorders associated with g protein-coupled receptor 35 (gpr35)

Non-Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
DUBE ET AL.: 'Assessment of the Carcinogenic Potential of a Proposed Food Coloring Additive Laccaic Acid, Using Short-Term Assays' CELL BIOLOGY AND TOXICOLOGY vol. 1, no. 1, 1984, *
TANIGUCHI ET AL.: '5-Nitro-2-(3-Phenylpropylamino)benzoic Acid Is a GPR35 Agonist' PHARMACOLOGY vol. 82, 2008, pages 245 - 249. *
WANG ET AL.: 'Kynurenic Acid as a Ligand for Orphan G Protein-coupled Receptor GPR35' THE JOURNAL OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY vol. 281, no. 31, 04 August 2006, pages 22021 - 22028 *
ZHAO ET AL.: 'Targeting of the Orphan Receptor GPR35 by Pamoic Acid: A Potent Activator of Extracellular Signal-Regulated Kinase and beta-Arrestin2 with Antinociceptive Activity' MOL PHARMACOL vol. 78, 2010, pages 560 - 568 *

Cited By (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN105163728A (en) * 2013-04-05 2015-12-16 蜜纽康新西兰有限公司 Therapeutic compositions comprising extracts of propolis and uses thereof
WO2014163512A1 (en) * 2013-04-05 2014-10-09 Manuka Health New Zealand Limited Therapeutic compositions comprising extracts of propolis and uses thereof
JP2016515615A (en) * 2013-04-05 2016-05-30 マヌカ ヘルス ニュージーランド リミテッド Therapeutic compositions comprising propolis extract and uses thereof
CN105163728B (en) * 2013-04-05 2018-10-02 蜜纽康新西兰有限公司 Including the therapeutic composition of propolis extract and its purposes
AU2014250138B2 (en) * 2013-04-05 2018-11-15 Manuka Health New Zealand Limited Therapeutic compositions comprising extracts of propolis and uses thereof
US10130617B2 (en) 2013-05-28 2018-11-20 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
US9155727B2 (en) 2013-05-28 2015-10-13 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
US9616050B2 (en) 2013-05-28 2017-04-11 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
WO2016010440A1 (en) * 2014-07-18 2016-01-21 Manuka Health New Zealand Limited Propolis and extracts thereof for the treatment of skin cancers and improvement of skin health
US11613539B2 (en) 2015-09-17 2023-03-28 Astrazeneca Ab Imidazo[4,5-c]quinolin-2-one compounds and their use in treating cancer
US10457679B2 (en) 2015-09-17 2019-10-29 Astrazeneca Ab Imidazo[4,5-c]quinolin-2-one compounds and their use in treating cancer
US10882858B2 (en) 2015-09-17 2021-01-05 Astrazeneca Ab Imidazo[4,5-c]quinolin-2-one compounds and their use in treating cancer
WO2018210658A1 (en) * 2017-05-15 2018-11-22 Basf Se Heteroaryl compounds as agrochemical fungicides
US11414387B2 (en) 2017-11-20 2022-08-16 Stingthera, Inc. Oxoacridinyl acetic acid derivatives and methods of use
US10745358B2 (en) 2017-11-20 2020-08-18 Silicon Swat, Inc. Oxoacridinyl acetic acid derivatives and methods of use
CN111285790A (en) * 2018-12-06 2020-06-16 泰州医药城国科化物生物医药科技有限公司 3-carboxycoumarin derivative capable of serving as GPR35 agonist, preparation method and application
CN109602735A (en) * 2018-12-07 2019-04-12 广州市妇女儿童医疗中心 The application of the drug and alpha-cyano -4- hydroxycinnamic acid of prevention and/or treatment intestines problem
US11834441B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2023-12-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels
US11919887B2 (en) 2019-12-06 2024-03-05 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Substituted tetrahydrofurans as modulators of sodium channels
US11827627B2 (en) 2021-06-04 2023-11-28 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated N-(hydroxyalkyl (hetero)aryl) tetrahydrofuran carboxamides as modulators of sodium channels
US11820747B2 (en) 2021-11-02 2023-11-21 Flare Therapeutics Inc. PPARG inverse agonists and uses thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2013022740A3 (en) 2013-05-10

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2013022740A2 (en) Gpr35 ligands and the uses thereof
US10588898B2 (en) Opioid receptor ligands and methods of using and making same
US20210023043A1 (en) Methods of Treating Hyperalgesia
BR112018007021B1 (en) Compound, composition comprising said compounds and use thereof to treat cystic fibrosis
US20130316985A1 (en) GPR35 Ligands And Uses Thereof
US20180222838A1 (en) Kynurenine-3-monooxygenase inhibitors, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods of use thereof
IL229246A (en) Partially saturated tricyclic compounds and methods of making and using same
US20190008803A1 (en) Combinations of opioid receptor ligands and cytochrome p450 inhibitors
US20120022116A1 (en) Compositions and methods for the treatment of pathological condition(s) related to gpr35 and/or gpr35-herg complex
JP2018514524A (en) 5-Aromatic alkynyl group-substituted benzamide compounds and methods for producing the same, drug compositions and uses
WO2018053373A1 (en) Uses of satl-inducible kinase (sik) inhibitors for treating osteoporosis
JP2020506878A (en) Activator of TREK (TWIK related K channel) channel
US20230054270A1 (en) Bifunctional compound, preparation method therefor, and use thereof
WO2016066115A1 (en) Substituted heterocyclic derivative, preparation method and use thereof
NZ713143B2 (en) Opioid receptor ligands and methods of using and making same
NZ615993B2 (en) Opioid receptor ligands and methods of using and making same
BR112013024136B1 (en) OPIOID RECEPTOR BINDING COMPOUNDS, THEIR PREPARATION PROCESS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING THE SAME AND THEIR USES

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12822443

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2

NENP Non-entry into the national phase in:

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12822443

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A2